ET 200SP Distributed IO System System Manual

Distributed I/O system
Preface
ET 200SP Documentation
Guide 1
New properties/functions 2
SIMATIC System overview 3
Application planning 4
ET 200SP
Distributed I/O system Installation 5
Wiring 6
System Manual Configuring 7
Basics of program execution 8
Protection 9
Configuration control (option
handling) 10
Commissioning 11
Maintenance 12
Test and service functions 13
Technical specifications 14
Dimension drawings A
Accessories/spare parts B
Calculating the leakage
resistance C
Safety-relevant symbols D
09/2019
A5E03576849-AJ
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03576849-AJ Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2019.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 09/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Preface
Purpose of the documentation

This documentation provides important information on configuring, installing, wiring and
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Basic knowledge required

A basic knowledge of automation technology is required to understand the documentation.
Validity of the documentation

This documentation applies to the distributed I/O system, ET 200SP.
Definition
In this document, " motor starter" always refers to all variants of the ET 200SP motor
starters.
Conventions
Please pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows:
Note
Notes contain important information on the product, handling the product or on part of the
documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
Standards
You can find a dated reference to the respective standards or the EC Declaration of
Conformity on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com)

System Manual, 09/2019, A5E03576849-AJ 3
Preface
Special information
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury, or Property Damage.
Proper use of hardware products
This equipment is only allowed to be used for the applications described in the catalog and
in the technical description, and only in conjunction with non-Siemens equipment and
components recommended by Siemens.
Correct transport, storage, installation and assembly, as well as careful operation and
maintenance, are required to ensure that the product operates safely and without faults.
EU note: Start-up/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the
machine in which the component described here is to be installed fulfills the
regulations/specifications of Directive 2006/42/EC.
Note
Important note for maintaining operational safety of your plant
Plants with safety-related features are subject to special operational safety requirements on
the part of the operator. Even suppliers are required to observe special measures during
product monitoring. For this reason, we inform you in the form of personal notifications about
product developments and features that are (or could be) relevant to operation of systems
from a safety perspective.
By subscribing to the appropriate notifications, you will ensure that you are always up-to-date
and able to make changes to your system, when necessary.
Log onto Industry Online Support. Go to the following links and, on the side, right click on
"email on update":
• SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13751)
• SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13828)
• SIMATIC WinAC RTX (F) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13915)
• SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F
• SIMATIC S7-1200/SIMATIC S7-1200F
• Distributed I/O (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14029)
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14667)
Note
When using F-CPUs in safety mode and fail-safe modules, observe the description of the
SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) fail-safe system.

4 System Manual, 09/2019, A5E03576849-AJ
Preface
Recycling and disposal

For ecologically sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified
disposal service for electronic scrap and dispose of the device in accordance with the
regulations in your country.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Preface
Siemens Industry Online Support

You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here:
● Product support
All the information and extensive know-how on your product, technical specifications,
FAQs, certificates, downloads, and manuals.
● Application examples
Tools and examples to solve your automation tasks – as well as function blocks,
performance information and videos.
● Services
Information about Industry Services, Field Services, Technical Support, spare parts and
training offers.
● Forums
For answers and solutions concerning automation technology.
● mySupport
Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages, support queries,
and configurable documents.
This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet.
See also
Industry Mall (https://mall.industry.siemens.com)

Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................. 12
2 New properties/functions ......................................................................................................................... 14
3 System overview...................................................................................................................................... 16
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system? .......................................................16
3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? .............................................19
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP? ..........................................20
3.4 Components............................................................................................................................24
4 Application planning................................................................................................................................. 33
4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules ..................................................................................38
4.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature
measurement ..........................................................................................................................38
4.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement ...................................................................39
4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit ..................................................................40
4.2.1 Selecting a BaseUnit for motor starters ..................................................................................40
4.2.2 Selecting the motor starter ......................................................................................................42
4.2.3 Selecting accessories for motor starters.................................................................................43
4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules ...................................................................................44
4.3.1 Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit ...................................................................................................44
4.3.2 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock ..........................................................................................46
4.4 Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................................47
4.5 Forming potential groups ........................................................................................................49
4.5.1 Basics .....................................................................................................................................49
4.5.2 Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1....................................................................54
4.5.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules ....................................................................55
4.5.4 Forming potential groups with motor starters .........................................................................57
4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups ..........................................................................59
4.6.1 Configuration examples with BaseUnits .................................................................................59
4.6.2 Configuration examples with potential distributor modules ....................................................61
5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 63
5.1 Basics .....................................................................................................................................63
5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters .................................................................................67
5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module .......................................................................................69
5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module .........................................................................71
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules ......................................................................................73
5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters .........................................................76

Table of contents
5.7 Installing potential distributor modules ................................................................................... 78

5.8 Installing the server module ................................................................................................... 79
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters .................................................................... 80
5.9.1 Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus ................................................................... 80
5.9.2 Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit ............................................................... 82
5.9.3 Mounting the BU cover .......................................................................................................... 85
6 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation ....................................................................................... 86
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules.................................................................................................................................. 88
6.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) for failsafe modules and failsafe motor starters ..... 88
6.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor
starters ................................................................................................................................... 89
6.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals ................................................................................. 91
6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters ........................................ 92
6.3.1 Protection against short circuit ............................................................................................... 92
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply ....................................................... 92
6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP ............................................................................... 96
6.6 Wiring rules ............................................................................................................................ 98
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules ........................................................................................ 101
6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules ........................................................................... 103
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters ..................................................................................... 105
6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter ........................................................... 109
6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module .............................................. 111
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication ............................................................................ 113
6.12.1 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU ................................................................. 113
6.12.2 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module/communications
module CM DP ..................................................................................................................... 115
6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers ......................................................... 116
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters .............................................................................. 118
6.14.1 Mounting the fan .................................................................................................................. 118
6.14.2 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters .............................................................................. 119
6.14.3 3DI/LC module ..................................................................................................................... 121
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP .............................................................................................................. 124
6.15.1 Factory markings.................................................................................................................. 124
6.15.2 Optional markings ................................................................................................................ 126
6.15.3 Applying color identification labels ....................................................................................... 127
6.15.4 Applying labeling strips ........................................................................................................ 129
6.15.5 Applying reference identification labels ............................................................................... 130
7 Configuring ............................................................................................................................................ 131
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP ......................................................................................................... 131

Table of contents
7.2 Configuring the CPU .............................................................................................................134

7.2.1 Reading out the configuration ...............................................................................................134
7.2.2 Addressing ............................................................................................................................137
7.2.3 Process images and process image partitions .....................................................................139
7.2.3.1 Process image - overview .....................................................................................................139
7.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions .................................................................140
7.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program ..........................................................140
7.3 Configuring the interface module ..........................................................................................142
8 Basics of program execution.................................................................................................................. 143
8.1 Events and OBs ....................................................................................................................143
8.2 Asynchronous instructions ....................................................................................................145
9 Protection .............................................................................................................................................. 155
9.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU ..................................................................155
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU ..........................................................................156
9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection .................................................159
9.4 Know-how protection ............................................................................................................160
9.5 Copy protection .....................................................................................................................164
10 Configuration control (option handling) .................................................................................................. 166
10.1 Configuring............................................................................................................................169
10.2 Creating the control data record ...........................................................................................171
10.2.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................171
10.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU ...........................................................................173
10.2.3 Control data record for an interface module .........................................................................175
10.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules ........................................................................179
10.2.5 Data records and functions ...................................................................................................181
10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU ....................................182
10.4 Behavior during operation.....................................................................................................186
10.5 Examples of configuration control.........................................................................................187
11 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................... 192
11.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................192
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO ................................................................194
11.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller ......................................................................................194
11.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device .............................................................................................196
11.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device ...................................................................................................198
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...............................................................199
11.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master ....................................................................................................199
11.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave .............................................................................................................201
11.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave ......................................................................................................203
11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots ............................................................................204
11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU ..................................................205

Table of contents
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU ............................................................................................... 206

11.6.1 STARTUP mode .................................................................................................................. 206
11.6.2 STOP mode ......................................................................................................................... 209
11.6.3 RUN mode ........................................................................................................................... 210
11.6.4 Operating mode transitions .................................................................................................. 210
11.7 CPU memory reset .............................................................................................................. 213
11.7.1 Automatic memory reset ...................................................................................................... 214
11.7.2 Manual memory reset .......................................................................................................... 214
11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation ........................................................................... 216
11.9 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration ................................................................. 217
11.9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 217
11.10 Time synchronization ........................................................................................................... 220
11.10.1 Example: Configuring and changing NTP server................................................................. 222
11.11 Identification and maintenance data .................................................................................... 226
11.11.1 Reading out and entering I&M data ..................................................................................... 226
11.11.2 Data record structure for I&M data....................................................................................... 228
11.11.3 Example: Read out firmware version of the CPU with Get_IM_Data................................... 230
11.12 Shared commissioning of projects ....................................................................................... 232
12 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 233
12.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)................................... 233
12.2 Changing the type of an I/O module .................................................................................... 237
12.3 Replacing an I/O module ..................................................................................................... 238
12.4 Replacing a motor starter..................................................................................................... 239
12.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit........................................................................ 240
12.6 Firmware update .................................................................................................................. 242
12.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings ...................................... 249
12.7.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings .................................................................................. 249
12.7.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings .......................................... 252
12.7.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET
button ................................................................................................................................... 253
12.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters ..................................... 255
12.9 Maintenance and repair ....................................................................................................... 257
12.10 Warranty............................................................................................................................... 257
13 Test and service functions ..................................................................................................................... 258
13.1 Test functions ....................................................................................................................... 258
13.2 Reading out/saving service data .......................................................................................... 264
14 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................................... 267
14.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes ............................................................................... 267
14.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................. 274
14.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules .............................................................. 278

Table of contents
14.4 Shipping and storage conditions...........................................................................................281

14.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions...............................................................282
14.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ....................................286
14.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .....................................288
A Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................................. 289
A.1 Shield connector ...................................................................................................................289
A.2 Labeling strip.........................................................................................................................289
A.3 Reference identification labels ..............................................................................................290
B Accessories/spare parts ........................................................................................................................ 291
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules .................................294
C Calculating the leakage resistance ........................................................................................................ 295
D Safety-relevant symbols ........................................................................................................................ 297
D.1 Safety-related symbols for devices without Ex protection ....................................................297
D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection .........................................................298
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 300
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 301

ET 200SP Documentation Guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, motion
control and OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742709).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

ET 200SP Documentation Guide
Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
(https://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

New properties/functions 2
What's new in the ET 200SP System Manual, Edition 09/2019 compared to Edition 02/2018
What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find information?
New con- BaseUnits BU30-MS7, A simple, wire-saving group shutdown for fail- Section Selecting motor start-
tents BU30-MS8, BU30-MS9 and safe motor starters. ers with a suitable BaseUnit
BU30-MS10 for fail-safe In contrast to the earlier solution (BU30-MS5 (Page 40)
motor starters and BU30-MS6), the fail-safe signal only has Section Forming potential
to be wired to the first motor starter. The fail- groups (Page 49)
safe signal is internally routed via the Ba- Section Wiring BaseUnits for
seUnits. motor starters (Page 105)
What's new in the system manual ET 200SP, edition 02/2018 compared to edition 12/2016
New con- Potential distributor modules Potential distributor modules are a space- Starting from section System
tents saving replacement for standard potential overview (Page 16)
distributors or potential distributor terminals.
You can set up potential groups much faster,
in a more compact design and with fewer
components than with standard potential
distributor systems.
One application is, for example, the design of
digital input modules with 16 channels and 3-
wire connection. By using the potential dis-
tributor modules, you are reserving the un-
used signal lines of antivalent sensors.
Another application is the supply of potentials
for external components.
Password provider As an alternative to manual password input Section Know-how protection
you can connect a password provider to (Page 160)
STEP 7. A password provider offers the fol-
lowing advantages:
• Convenient handling of passwords.
STEP 7 reads the password automatically
for the blocks. This saves you time.
• Optimal block protection because the
operators do not know the actual pass-
word.

New properties/functions
GetSMCinfo instruction With the help of the GetSMCinfo instruction Section AUTOHOTSPOT
you can respond to information provided by
the memory card in the user program and if
required, replace the memory card as a pre-
cautionary measure. This makes sense in
particular if you write to the card often in your
application, for example if you use data logs.
Testing with breakpoints When testing with breakpoints, you execute a Section Test functions
program from one breakpoint to another. (Page 258)
Testing with breakpoints provides you with
the following advantages:
• Testing SCL and STL program code with
the help of breakpoints
• Localization of logic errors step by step
• Simple and quick analysis of complex
programs prior to actual commissioning
• Recording of current values within individ-
ual executed loops
• Use of breakpoints for program validation
also possible in SCL/STL networks within
LAD/FBD blocks
Changed Reading out the identification With the Get_IM_Data instruction you can Section Reading out and enter-
contents and maintenance data using read out the identification and maintenance ing I&M data (Page 226)
the Get_IM_Data instruction data of the modules without much program-
ming work.
With the Get_IM_Data instruction, you can
access the identification and maintenance
data (I&M) of a module in the user program.
I&M data is information saved in a module.
This allows you to
• check the system configurations
• react to hardware changes
• react to hardware faults in the user pro-
gram.
Finding and elimination of hardware errors is
made easier.
Time synchronization For all applications that need the exact time, Section Time synchronization
you update the CPU time using the NTP (Page 220)
process. This also automatically sets the
CPU time beyond subnet limits.
Firmware update via acces- You are given information on fast firmware Section Firmware update
sible devices updates via accessible devices in the net- (Page 242)
work.

System overview 3
3.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?
SIMATIC ET 200SP
SIMATIC ET 200SP is a scalable and highly flexible distributed I/O system for connecting
process signals to a higher-level controller via a fieldbus.
Customer benefits of the system
Figure 3-1 SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system - Customer benefits

System overview
Area of application
Thanks to its multifunctionality, the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for
a wide range of applications. Its scalable design allows you to tailor your configuration to
local requirements. Different CPUs/interface modules are available for connection to
PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP.
SIMATIC ET 200SP with CPU allows intelligent pre-processing to relieve the higher-level
controller. The CPU can also be used as standalone device.
By using fail-safe CPUs, you can implement applications for safety engineering.
Configuration and programming of your safety program takes place the same way as for
standard CPUs.
A wide range of I/O modules rounds off the product range.
SIMATIC ET 200SP is designed with degree of protection IP20 and is intended for
installation in a control cabinet.
Configuration
The SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is installed on a mounting rail. It consists of:
● CPU/interface module
● Up to 64 I/O modules, which can be plugged into BaseUnits in any combination
● Up to 31 motor starters
● A server module that completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.

System overview
Configuration example
① CPU/interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnit BU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnits BU..B for extending the potential group
④ BaseUnit for motor starter
⑤ Server module (included in the scope of delivery of the CPU/interface module)
⑥ ET 200SP motor starter
⑦ I/O module
⑧ BusAdapter
⑨ Mounting rail
⑩ Reference identification label
Figure 3-2 Configuration example of the ET 200SP

System overview
3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?
3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?
Fail-safe automation systems

Fail-safe automation systems (F-systems) are used in systems with higher safety
requirements. F-systems control processes and ensure that they are in a safe state
immediately after shutdown. In other words, F-systems control processes in which an
immediate shutdown does not endanger persons or the environment.
Safety Integrated
Safety Integrated is the integrated safety concept for automation and drive technology from
Siemens.
Proven technologies and systems from automation technology are used for safety systems.
Safety Integrated includes the complete safety sequence, ranging from sensor, actuator and
fail-safe modules right through to the controller, including safety-related communication via
standard fieldbuses. Drives and controllers handle safety tasks in addition to their actual
functions.
Fail-safe modules
The key difference between fail-safe modules (F-modules) and standard modules is that they
have an internal two-channel design. This means the two integrated processors monitor
each other, automatically test the input and output circuits, and switch the fail-safe module to
a safe state in the event of a fault.
The F-CPU communicates with a fail-safe module via the safety-related PROFIsafe bus
profile.
Fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters enable safety-related tripping of motor loads. Fail-safe motor starters
are not PROFIsafe nodes. Motor starters operate together with the fail-safe modules of the
ET 200SP system.
Area of application of ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

By using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with fail-safe I/O modules, you are replacing
conventional safety engineering configurations. This includes the replacement of switching
devices for emergency STOP, protective door monitors, two-hand operation, etc.

System overview
3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?
SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP

The figure below shows an example of a configuration for a SIMATIC Safety F-system with
ET 200SP distributed I/O system and PROFINET IO. The PROFINET IO lines can be set up
with copper cable, fiber-optic cable or WLAN.
Fail-safe I/O modules and non-fail-safe I/O modules can be combined in an ET 200SP
configuration.
The fail-safe IO controller (F-CPU) exchanges safety-related and non-safety-related data
with fail-safe and non-fail-safe ET 200SP modules.
Figure 3-3 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration)
Fail-safe ET 200SP I/O modules

The following fail-safe I/O modules are available for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Fail-safe power modules are used to supply the potential group load voltage and for the
safety-related tripping of the load voltage for non-fail-safe output modules.
● Fail-safe digital input modules detect the signal states of safety-related sensors and send
the relevant safety frames to the F-CPU.
● Fail-safe digital output modules are suitable for safety-related shutdown procedures with
short circuit and cross-circuit protection up to the actuator.
ET 200SP fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters are suitable for safety-related tripping of motor loads.

System overview
Example of a configuration with fail-safe I/O modules
① Interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnit BU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnits BU..B for conducting the potential group further
④ I/O module
⑤ Server module (ships with the interface module)
⑥ Fail-safe I/O modules
⑦ BusAdapter
⑧ Mounting rail
⑨ Reference identification label
Figure 3-4 Example of a configuration of the ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

System overview
Hardware and software requirements

Fail-safe modules ET 200SP are supported by IM155-6PN ST interface modules as of
firmware V1.1.1, IM155-6PN HF as of firmware V2.0, IM155-6PN HS as of firmware V4.0
and IM155-6DP HF as of firmware V1.0.
You require the STEP 7 Safety Advanced option package, V12 or higher including HSP 54,
for configuration and programming of the ET 200SP fail-safe modules with the SIMATIC
Safety fail-safe system.
You require the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP10 or later for configuring and programming
the ET 200SP failsafe modules with the Distributed Safety failsafe system.
You require the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP12 or later for configuring and programming
the ET 200SP failsafe modules with the F/FH Systems failsafe system.
ET 200SP fail-safe motor starters are supported by interface modules IM155-6PN BA,
firmware V3.2 or higher, IM155-6PN ST, firmware V3.1 or higher, IM155-6PN HF, firmware
V3.1 or higher and IM155-6DP HF firmware V3.0 or higher.
You require SIMATIC Step 7 V14 or higher for configuration and programming of ET 200SP
fail-safe motor starters. The F-Configuration Pack is not needed for configuration and
programming of the ET 200SP fail-safe motor starter.
Note
Configuration of ET 200SP motor starters, SIMATIC Step 7 V13 or higher, is possible with a
GSD file (GSDML).
Use in safety mode only

Safety mode is the F-I/O operating mode that allows safety-related communication using
safety frames.
Safety mode of motor starters is characterized by the fail-safe digital input (F-DI) and
availability of the 24 V power supply.
You can only use the ET 200SP fail-safe I/O modules in safety mode. They cannot be used
in non-fail-safe mode.

System overview
Achievable safety classes

The fail-safe modules are equipped with integrated safety functions for safety mode.
You can achieve the safety classes of the table below:
● With the appropriate parameter assignment of the safety functions in STEP 7
● With a specific combination of fail-safe and non-fail-safe I/O modules
● With a special arrangement and wiring of the sensors and actuators
Table 3- 1 Safety classes that can be achieved with ET 200SP in safety mode
Safety class in safety mode

According to IEC 61508 In accordance with ISO 13849-1
SIL2 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level d
SIL3 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level e
SIL3 Category 4 (PL) Performance Level e
Additional information
You will find the use cases and wiring for the relevant safety class in the manuals of the fail-
safe I/Os and the fail-safe motor starters.

System overview
3.4 Components
3.4 Components
Basic components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table 3- 2 Basic components of the ET 200SP
Basic component Function Figure

Mounting rail in accord- The mounting rail is the rack of the ET 200SP.
ance with EN 60715 The ET 200SP is installed on the mounting rail.
The mounting rail is 35 mm high.
CPU/Fail-safe CPU The (F) CPU:

• Runs the user program. The F-CPU also
runs the safety program.
• Can be used as an IO controller or I-Device
on PROFINET IO or as a standalone CPU
• Links the ET 200SP to the IO devices or the
IO controller
• Exchanges data with the I/O modules via the
backplane bus.
Additional CPU functions:
• Communication via PROFIBUS DP (the CPU
can be used as a DP master or DP slave in
combination with the CM DP communication
module)
• Integrated Web server
• Integrated technology
• Integrated trace functionality
• Integrated system diagnostics
• Integrated safety
• Safety mode (when using fail-safe CPUs)

System overview
3.4 Components

Communication module The communication module CM DP
CM DP
• Connects the CPU with PROFIBUS DP
• The bus connection is an RS485 interface
Interface module for The interface module:

PROFINET IO
• Can be used as IO device on PROFINET IO
• Links the ET 200SP with the IO controller
backplane bus.
Interface module for The interface module:

PROFIBUS DP
• Can be used as DP slave on PROFIBUS DP
• Links the ET 200SP with the DP master
backplane bus.

System overview
3.4 Components

BusAdapter The BusAdapters allow free selection of the
connection technology for PROFINET IO. The
following versions are available for PROFINET
CPU/interface modules:
• For standard RJ45 connector (BA 2×RJ45)
①
• For direct connection of the bus cable
(BA 2×FC) ②
• For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA 2xSCRJ)
③
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic
cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA
SCRJ/RJ45) ④
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic
cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable
(BA SCRJ/FC) ⑤
• For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC) ⑥
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable
⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45) ⑦
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable
⇔ direct connection of the bus cable (BA
LC/FC) ⑧
For mixed ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration,

you require the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC ①
(plugged into the BaseUnit BU-Send). Connect
the bus cable for ET-Connection to the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.

System overview
3.4 Components

BaseUnit The BaseUnits provide the electrical and me-
chanical connection of the ET 200SP modules.
Place the I/O modules or the motor starter onto
the BaseUnits.
Suitable BaseUnits are available in each case
for the different requirements. You can find addi-
tional information in section Selecting the Ba-
seUnit for I/O modules (Page 38).
PotDis-BaseUnit poten- You use the potential distributor module to dis-

tial distributor module tribute a variety of potentials (P1, P2). This al-
lows you to implement a multi-cable connection
without external terminals with 16-channel digital
modules.
The assembly has two parts:
• If you need additional potential terminals,
plug a PotDis-TerminalBlock in the PotDis-
BaseUnit.
• Alternatively, plug a BU cover (15 mm) on
the PotDis-BaseUnit.
With potential distributor modules, you may only
connect to the PotDis-TB versions BR-W and
n.c.-G potential, which exceed the voltage level
of SELV/PELV. Other SELV/PELV potential
groups should be separated with light-colored
PotDis BUs.
Suitable PotDis-BaseUnits are available in each
case for the different requirements. You can find
additional information in section Selecting a
PotDis-BaseUnit (Page 44).
PotDis-TerminalBlock If you need additional potential terminals for a
PotDis-BaseUnit, plug a PotDis-TerminalBlock in
the PotDis-BaseUnit.
Voltages greater than SELV/PELV are only
permitted for the PO PotDis-TBs BR (bridged)
and NC (not connected). The same applies to
PE. Voltages at the terminals of the PotDis
modules connected to the P1/P2 rails must not
be greater than SELV/PELV.
Suitable PotDis-TerminalBlocks are available in
each case for the different requirements. You
can find additional information in section Select-
ing a PotDis-TerminalBlock (Page 46).

System overview
3.4 Components

Fail-safe power module The fail-safe power module allows the safety-
related shutdown of digital output modules / fail-
safe digital output modules.
I/O module / fail-safe The I/O module determines the function at the
I/O module terminals. The controller detects the current
process state via the connected sensors and
actuators, and triggers the corresponding reac-
tions. I/O modules are divided into the following
module types:
• Digital input (DI, F-DI)
• Digital output (DQ, F-DQ PM, F-DQ PP,
F-RQ)
• Analog input (AI)
• Analog output (AQ)
• Technology module (TM)
• Communication module (CM)
Motor starter/fail-safe The motor starter is a switching and protection
motor starter device for 1-phase and 3-phase loads.
The motor starter is available as a direct-on-line
and reversing starter.

System overview
3.4 Components

Vale terminal AirLINE Basic component:
SP type 8647 (Bürkert Valve terminal AirLINE SP type 8647 (Bürkert).
GmbH & Co. KG) 1) 2) For more information on the AirLINE SP, type
8647 (e.g. data sheet and operating instruc-
tions), please contact Bürkert
(https://www.burkert.co.uk/en/type/8647) direct-
ly.
Function:
Valve terminals are common in industrial auto-
mation and are used as pilot valves for control-
ling pneumatic actuators, for example in areas of
the food, pharmaceutical and water treatment
industries. The ET 200SP in combination with
the AirLINE SP, type 8647 from Bürkert provides
a universal interface between process and plant
control that enables the flexible, modular config-
uration of pilot valves and I/O modules. The
valve terminal can also be fitted to the base of
the control cabinet with the help of the AirLINE
Quick Adapter. This further reduces the space
required in the control cabinet and considerably
simplifies installation of the pneumatic system. 1)
2)
BU cover Insert the BU cover on the BaseUnits:

• Whose slots are not equipped with I/O mod-
ules/ motor starters//PotDis-TerminalBlocks.
• Whose slots have been reserved for future
expansion (as empty slots).
You can keep a reference identification label for
the planned I/O module inside the BU cover.
There are three versions:
• For BaseUnits with a width of 15 mm ①
• For BaseUnits with a width of 20 mm ②
• For BaseUnits of motor starters with a width
of 30 mm ③

System overview
3.4 Components

Server module The server module completes the configuration
of the ET 200SP. The server module includes
holders for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm).
The server module ships with the CPU/interface
module.
Coding element The coding element codes the I/O module with
the BaseUnit.
There are two versions:
• Mechanical coding element ①: Ensures the
coding
• Electronic coding element ②: This version
also has an electronic, rewritable memory for
module-specific configuration data (such as
the F-destination address for fail-safe mod-
ules, parameter data for the IO link master).
1) Note: The description contains non-binding information on supplementary products that are manufactured and marketed
not by Siemens but by third-parties outside the Siemens group ("third-party firms"). These third parties organize the
manufacture, sale and delivery of their products independently and their terms and conditions apply.
Responsibility for these supplementary products and for the information relating to them that is provided here thus lies
solely with the third parties in question. Unless bound to do so by statutory requirements, Siemens shall not accept any
liability or provide any guarantee for the supplementary products of third-party firms. Please also note the information
"Disclaimer/Use of hyperlinks".
2) Disclaimer/Use of hyperlinks: Siemens has put together this description with great care. However, Siemens is unable to
check whether the data provided by third-party firms is complete, accurate and up to date. Certain items of information
may therefore potentially be incorrect, incomplete or no longer up to date. Siemens shall not accept any liability should
this be the case, nor shall it accept liability for the usability of the data or of the product for the user unless it has a statu-
tory obligation to do so.
This entry contains the addresses of third-party websites. Siemens is not responsible for and shall not be liable for these
websites or their content, as Siemens has not checked the information contained therein and is not responsible for the
content or information they provide. The use of such websites is at the user's own risk.

System overview
3.4 Components
Accessories of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table 3- 3 Accessories of the ET 200SP
Accessories Function Figure

24 V DC connector Applying the 24 V DC supply at the connector and
connection with the CPU/interface module, for exam-
ple.
Shield connection The shield connection allows the low-impedance

contacting of cable shields with minimum installation
times.
Labeling strips Attach the labeling strips to the modules for system-
specific labeling of the ET 200SP. The labeling strips
can be printed.
The labeling strips can be ordered as accessories
(Page 291) on a roll for thermal transfer printers or as
DIN A4 format sheets for laser printers.
Reference identification The labels enable the reference identification labeling
labels of the ET 200SP components.
The labels can be ordered on a mat for thermal
transfer and inkjet printers as accessories
(Page 291).
Color identification labels The color identification labels are module-specific
and can be ordered for the process terminals, AUX
terminals and additional terminals as accessories
(Page 291).

System overview
3.4 Components
Accessories of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters
Table 3- 4 SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter accessories
Accessories Function Figure

3DI/LC module The optional 3DI/LC module has three digital inputs and one
LC input. For reasons of operational safety, input LC is per-
manently set to manual local mode. By parameterizing the
inputs DI1 - DI3 with motor CLOCKWISE or motor
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE, you can control the motor in
manual local mode.
The functions of the 3DI/LC module are not relevant to func-
tional safety.
Detailed information on the functions when using a 3DI/LC
module can be found in the Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/10947
9973).
Mechanical bracket for Use the mechanical bracket for additional fixing of the motor
BaseUnit starter. You can use the mechanical bracket on 7.5 mm and
15 mm mounting rails.
Infeed bus cover For finger-safe termination of the infeed bus, use the cover.
Fan You can use the motor starter at higher ambient tempera-
tures if a fan is installed.

Application planning 4
Overview
The BaseUnits (BU) are classified according to different types. Every BaseUnit type is
distinguished by characteristics that match certain I/O modules and motor starters (see the
following table and graphics).
You recognize the BU type for an I/O module by the last two digits of an I/O module's article
number.
The BU type onto which you can plug the respective I/O module is printed on the I/O
modules. You can therefore read which BU type you need straight from the I/O module (see
Factory labels (Page 124) (page 122)).
Example: On the output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST with article number 6ES7132-
6BH01-0BA0 the information "BU: A0" is printed. This means you can plug this I/O module
into a BaseUnit of BU type "A0", which means any BaseUnit whose article number ends in
"A0". I/O modules that are suitable for two BU types are labeled accordingly, for example
"BU: A0, A1".
Note
You will find a complete overview of the possibilities of combining BaseUnits and I/O
modules /motor starters in the Product information for documentation of the ET 200SP I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864).

Application planning
Table 4- 1 Selecting a suitable BaseUnit for I/O modules
Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type A0 Digital, fail-safe, DI 16×24VDC ST BU15-P16+A0+2D
See Digital, fail-safe, technology or com- (6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0) (6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0)
communication, tech- munication module
nology or analog • 6ES7...A0
modules without tem-
• 24 V DC
perature measure-
ment (Page 38) • 15 mm wide
BU type A1 Analog module with AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4- BU15-
See Analog modules temperature meas- wire HF P16+A0+2D/T(6ES7193-
with temperature urement* (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 6BP00-0DA1)
measurement • 6ES7...A1
(Page 39)
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide
Analog module with- AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
out temperature (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
measurement**
• 6ES7...A1
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide
BU type B0 Digital output module RQ 4×120VDC- BU20-P12+A4+0B
(BU..B, dark-colored with relay 230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...B0 (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type B1 Digital modules DI 4×120..230VAC ST BU20-P12+A0+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1)
• 6ES7...B1
BaseUnit)
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type C0 Fail-safe power mod- CM AS-i Master ST BU20-P6+A2+4D
(BU..D, light-colored ule (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C0
• 24 V DC
• 20 mm wide
CM AS-
i Master ST/F-
CM AS-i Safety ST
• 6ES7...C1
• Up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide

Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type C1 F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-CM AS-i Safety ST BU20-P6+A2+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C1
• Up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide
BU type D0 AI Energy Meter AI Energy Meter 480VAC BU20-P12+A0+0B
ST (6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0)
• 6ES7...D0
(6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0)
• Up to 400 V AC/
480 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type F0 F- F- BU20-P8+A4+0B
RQ 1×24VDC/24..230 RQ 1×24VDC/24..230VA (6E7193-6BP20-0BF0)
VAC/5A C/5A
(6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
• 6ES7...F0
• Up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type U0 DQ 4×24...230VAC/2 DQ 4×24...230VAC/2A HF BU20-P16+A0+2D
A HF (6ES7132-6FD00-0CU0) (6E7193-6BP00-0BU0)
• 6ES7...U0
• Up to
400 V AC/480 V A
C
• 20 mm wide
* For compensation of the reference junction temperature for thermocouples. BU type A1 is required if
you measure the reference junction temperature with an internal temperature sensor or if you need
the additional 2×5 terminals.
If you use the internal reference junction temperature with BU type A1, ensure an even tempera-
ture distribution at the terminals. The specified accuracy of the utilized analog module is then ad-
hered to. If necessary, you can increase the accuracy via user calibration.
** Analog modules with and without temperature measurement can also be plugged into BU type A0.

Table 4- 2 BaseUnit for motor starters
Selecting the BaseUnit

BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30- BU-30-
MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 MS7 MS8 MS9 MS10
24 V infeed x x
500 V infeed x x x x x
F-DI terminals x x
(no routing of the F-DI
signal possible)
F-DI infeed x x
F-DI routing x x
Motor starters
DS 0.1 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
0.4 A HF 0AA00-
0CP0
DS 0.3 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
1A HF 0AB00-
0CP0
DS 0.9 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
3A HF 0AC00-
0CP0
DS 2.8 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
9A HF 0AD00-
0CP0
DS 4.0 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
12A HF 0AE00-
0CP0
RS 0.1 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
0.4 A HF 0BA00-
0CP0
RS 0.3 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
1A HF 0BB00-
0CP0
RS 0.9 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
3A HF 0BC00-
0CP0
RS 2.8 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
9A HF 0BD00-
0CP0
RS 4.0 - 3RK1308- x x x x x* x* x* x* x* x*
12A HF 0BE00-
0CP0
F-DS 0.1 - 3RK1308- x x x x x x x x x x
0.4 A HF 0CA00-
0CP0
1A HF 0CB00-
0CP0


3A HF 0CC00-
0CP0
9A HF 0CD00-
0CP0
12A HF 0CE00-
0CP0
F-RS 0.1 - 3RK1308- x x x x x x x x x x
0.4 A HF 0DA00-
0CP0
1A HF 0DB00-
0CP0
3A HF 0DC00-
0CP0
9A HF 0DD00-
0CP0
12A HF 0DE00-
0CP0
* The F-DI terminals or F-DI infeed/routing have no function with this combination.
Additional information on the functional assignment of the terminals and on the associated
BaseUnits can be found in one of the following manuals:
● Manual for the relevant I/O module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● Manual BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)
● Motor starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual

4.1 Selecting the BaseUnit for I/O modules
4.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without

temperature measurement
Selection of a suitable BaseUnit
① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adjacent module on the left.
The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light-colored BaseUnit for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the first BaseUnit in the
ET 200SP configuration can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of
V3.0).
Dark-colored BaseUnit: Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent module on the left.
② AUX terminal: 10 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/10 A or as protective conductors.
Example: Multiple cable connection for DI 8×24VDC ST
Figure 4-1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature measurement

4.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement
Selection of a suitable BaseUnit
① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adja-
cent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light -colored BaseUnit
for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Dark-coloredBaseUnit: Continuation of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent
module on the left.
② Additional terminals: 2×5 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/2 A
Example: Sensor supply for AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST
Figure 4-2 Analog modules with temperature measurement

4.2 Selecting motor starters with a suitable BaseUnit
4.2.1 Selecting a BaseUnit for motor starters

The motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1", "BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3" and "BU30-MS4" are
compatible with all non-fail-safe motor starters. The motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1",
"BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3", "BU30-MS4", "BU30-MS5", "BU30-MS6", "BU30-MS7", "BU30-
MS8", "BU30-MS9" and "BU30-MS10" are compatible with all fail-safe motor starters. You
will find an overview of available BaseUnits for motor starters here (Page 33). With the
different BaseUnits, you can form different potential groups for the 24 V DC electronics
supply (L+/M) and for the AC infeed.
Voltage range
The voltage range of the AC infeed is between 48 V AC and 500 V AC.

Selection criteria for the BaseUnit

The figure below shows the criteria you use to select the appropriate BaseUnit:
Form separate potential groups on the infeed bus for single-phase (L, N, PE) and three-
phase (L1, L2, L3, PE) operation.

4.2.2 Selecting the motor starter

You select the suitable motor starter using the load type according to the following scheme:

4.2.3 Selecting accessories for motor starters

Observe the installation conditions of the station with ET 200SP motor starters. The figure
below shows the criteria the station must meet:

4.3 Selecting potential distributor modules
4.3.1 Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit
Selection of a suitable PotDis-BaseUnit potential distributor module
① Light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from

adjacent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light-colored Ba-
seUnit for the incoming supply voltage.
② P1 terminal: 16 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 48 V DC/10 A
Example: Multiple cable connection for DI 16×24VDC ST
Figure 4-3 PotDis-BaseUnits

Please note:
● The potential groups opened with a light-colored PotDis-BU must not contain any I/O
modules. You can integrate any dark-colored PotDis-BUs into I/O module potential
groups provided they are based on an SELV/PELV supply.
● If you do not need the additional terminals of the PotDis-TB in a potential distributor
module, replace the PotDis-TB with a BU cover. You may only connect one potential
group within a combination of PotDis-BU and PotDis-TB.
● Only SELV/PELV potentials are permitted on PotDis-BUs. Separate different SELV/PELV
potential groups using light-colored PotDis-BUs.
● With potential distributor modules, you may only connect to the PotDis-TB versions BR-W
and n.c.-G potential, which exceed the voltage level of SELV/PELV.
● PotDis terminals are not directly configurable as PotDis via GSD/GSDML. When
configuring with GSD, always use an dummy module; with GSDML, integrate a free
space.
Additional information on the potential distributor modules (PotDis-BaseUnits and PotDis-
TerminalBlocks) is available in the BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual.

4.3.2 Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock
Selection of a suitable PotDis-TerminalBlock

With a PotDis-TerminalBlock you are expanding a PotDis-BaseUnit potential distributor
module by an additional 18 potential terminals.
You can freely combine PotDis-TerminalBlocks and PotDis-BaseUnits.
The following PotDis-TerminalBlocks are available:
Table 4- 3 Selection of TerminalBlock PotDis-TB
PotDis-TerminalBlocks
TerminalBlock Explanation Application
PotDis-TB-P1-R Terminal block with 18 terminals with red spring Provision of 18 x P1 potential, e.g. for P1 sensor
releases with connection to the supply voltage supply with 3-wire connection for 16-channel digital
P1 of the PotDis-BaseUnit with SELV/PELV. input modules
PotDis-TB-P2-B Terminal block with 18 terminals with blue Provision of 18 x P2 potential, e.g. for ground of
spring releases with connection to ground (P2) the sensor supply with 2-wire connection for 16-
of the PotDis-BaseUnit channel digital output modules
PotDis-TB-n.c.-G Terminal block with 18 terminals with gray Provision of 18 x n.c. (not connected), for reserving
spring releases without connection to each ("parking") unused signals/lines, e.g. for antivalent
other or to a voltage bus of the PotDis-BaseUnit sensors in the same potential group
PotDis-TB-BR-W Terminal block with 18 terminals connected to Provision of 17 terminals with shared potential (the
each other with white spring releases without 18th terminal is used for infeed) for supply of ex-
connection to a voltage bus of the PotDis- ternal consumers
BaseUnit
Additional information on the potential distributor modules (PotDis-BaseUnits and PotDis-
TerminalBlocks) is available in the BaseUnits

4.4 Hardware configuration
Maximum mechanical configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP
has been reached:
Table 4- 4 Maximum mechanical configuration
Properties Rule
Number of modules Maximum of 12/30/32/64 I/O modules (depending on the CPU
used/the interface module used; see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) and interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) manuals)
For every 6 F-modules F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-
6RA00-0BF0), the maximum configuration is reduced by 1 module.
Number of motor starters Maximum of 31 motor starters
Backplane bus length of the maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU/interface module, includ-
ET 200SP ing server module)
Electrical maximum configuration for I/O modules

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the following factors:
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current carrying capacity of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/M is 10 A.
Current carrying capacity refers to the current load via the power bus and the infeed bus of
the ET 200SP station. Consider the current carrying capacity when using a motor starter.
Maximum electrical configuration for motor starter power bus (24 V DC)
To determine the current requirement of an individual motor starter via the power bus, take
account of the following parameters:
● Current consumption via DC infeed in the ON state
● Current consumption via DC infeed when switching on (40 ms peak load)
● Increased power consumption through fan operation
● Current requirement via encoder supply of the connected DI module
The maximum current carrying capacity of the 24 V potential group is 7 A across the entire
permissible temperature range.

Maximum electrical configuration for motor starter infeed bus (500 V AC)
To determine the current requirement of an individual motor starter via the infeed bus,
proceed as follows:
Calculate the current requirement via the main current paths of the individual motor starter.
In doing so, take into account the parameter Ie (set rated operational current of the motor
starter). The permissible overload characteristics of the motor feeder for motors are
determined with the thermal motor model. You calculate the current value (Iinfeed bus) for the
infeed bus of the ET 200SP system according to the following formula:
Iinfeed bus = ∑n(Ie * 1.125)
n = number of motor starters of a potential group on the infeed bus
Refer to the Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) for
details of how to assign the basic rated operational current Ie parameter.
The following values apply for the potential group of the AC infeed:
● The maximum current carrying capacity is 32 A at an ambient temperature of up to 50 °C.
● The maximum current carrying capacity is 27 A at an ambient temperature of up to 60 °C.
● The maximum current carrying capacity for applications according to UL requirements is
24 A at an ambient temperature of up to 60 °C.
Address space
The address space depends on the CPU/interface module (see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/133300) Manual) and the
interface module used (see Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual):
● For PROFINET IO: Dependent on the IO controller/IO device used
● For PROFIBUS DP: Dependent on the DP master used

4.5 Forming potential groups
4.5.1 Basics
Introduction
Potential groups for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are formed by systematically
arranging the BaseUnits.
Requirements
For formation of potential groups, the ET 200SP distinguishes between the
following BaseUnits:
● BaseUnits BU...D (recognizable by the light-colored terminal box and the light-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Opening of a new potential group (power busbar and AUX bus are interrupted to the
left)
– Feeding in the supply voltages (DC or AC) up to an infeed current of 10 A, depending
on the BaseUnit used.
● BaseUnits BU...B (recognizable by the dark-colored terminal box and the dark-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Conduction of the potential group (power busbar and AUX bus continued)
– Tapping the supply voltages (DC or AC) for external components or looping through
with a maximum total current of 10 A, depending on the BaseUnit used.
● BaseUnits BU30-MSx (BaseUnit for the motor starter only)
Depending on the version, the BaseUnits in the "BU30-MSx" model series possess the
following properties:
– Opening a new potential group or continuing an existing one
– Feeding in the supply voltage L+ up to an infeed current of 7 A DC
– Opening a new load group or continuing an existing one by means of 500 V AC infeed
bus
– Feeding in the line voltage up to an infeed current of 32 A AC
– Feeding in and routing the F-DI signal
Note
The BaseUnits BU...B of type B1 and D0 loop through the voltage buses P1/P2 and the AUX
bus. The buses are not tapped by the module.

Placement and grouping of I/O modules

Each BaseUnit BU...D that you install in the ET 200SP configuration opens a new potential
group and supplies all subsequent I/O modules (on BaseUnits BU...B) with the necessary
supply voltage. The first 24 V DC I/O module to the right of the CPU/interface module must
be installed on a light-colored BaseUnit BU...D. Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or
an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the first BaseUnit in the ET 200SP configuration
can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of
V3.0).
If you want to place another BaseUnit BU...B after a BaseUnit BU...D, disconnect the power
and AUX buses and open a new potential group at the same time. This allows individual
grouping of the supply voltages.
Note
All BaseUnits placed in a load group must match the infeed potential of the corresponding
light-colored BaseUnits.
Do not connect any BaseUnit of the "BU...B" type on the right of a motor starter's BaseUnit
(BU30-MSxx).
Placing and connecting potential distributor modules

Potential distributor modules provide potential distributors integrated into the system that you
can use to configure a rapid, space-saving customized replacement for standard potential
distribution systems.
You can place potential distributor modules at any location within the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system. To do so, you must observe the same design rules as for placing and connecting
I/O modules. Potential distributor modules are only suitable for SELV/PELV.
A potential distributor module consists of a potential distributor BaseUnit (PotDis-BU) and (if
necessary) a potential distributor TerminalBlock (PotDis-TB) plugged onto it. If you do not
need the additional terminals of the PotDis-TB, install a BU cover (15 mm) on the PotDis-
BaseUnit.
You must not place a BaseUnit for I/O modules in a PotDis potential group formed with a
light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit.
Note
Identical voltages with potential distributor modules
You can only connect identical (supplied) voltages with to the terminals of a potential
distributor module or PotDis potential group. Example: You only connect 24 V DC.

Placement and grouping of I/O modules and motor starters

For the potential group (L+/M), the following slot rules apply within the motor starter modules
and other I/O modules of the ET 200SP:
● An unassembled BaseUnit (BaseUnit with BU cover) must be inserted between the CPU,
an interface module or an I/O module and the motor starter. This is not necessary
between the motor starters.
● The empty slot can take on the potential (24 V DC) of the potential group on the left of it
(L+, M), i.e. I/O modules and motor starters can be operated in the same potential group.
● If you would like to insert an I/O module on the right of a motor starter, then use only one
BaseUnit of the BU...D Typ A0 type (light terminal box).
● The BaseUnits BU30-MS2, BU30-MS4, BU30-MS5, BU30-MS6, BU30-MS7, BU30-MS8,
BU30-MS9 and BU30-MS10 can continue the potential group of other BaseUnit types.
However, note the following exceptions:
– Only a BaseUnit of type BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 may follow an AS-i module
(AS-i potential group).
– Only BaseUnits with fail-safe motor starters can be connected together in the same
potential group of an F-PM-E.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Hazardous electrical voltage can cause electric shock, burns and property damage.
Disconnect your system and devices from the power supply before starting any assembly
tasks.

AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus)

BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals (e.g. BU15-P16+A10+2D) enable the additional
connection of a potential (up to the maximum supply voltage of the module), which is applied
via the AUX bus.
In the case of light-colored BaseUnits, the AUX bus is interrupted to the left. In the case of
BaseUnits BU30-MS1 to BU30-MS7 and BU30-MS10 , the AUX bus is interrupted to the left.
The AUX bus of BU30-MS8 and BU30-MS9 is used for F-DI routing.
The AUX bus can be used individually:
● As a PE bar, in which case you may plug a maximum of 8 BaseUnits in the corresponding
potential group
● For additionally required voltage
NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals, and establish a functional connection to the
central protective conductor connection.
If you stop using the AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, make sure you remove the
yellow-green color identification labels and remove the connection to the central protective
conductor connection again.
The AUX bus is designed as follows:

● Maximum current carrying capacity (at 60 °C ambient air temperature): 10 A
● Permissible voltage: Depending on the BaseUnit type (see BaseUnit manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521))
Note
The AUX potential must always be identical to the potential group of the supply voltage if it is
not being used as PE.
Self-assembling voltage buses

You must feed in the supply voltage L+ via the BaseUnit BU...D, BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 .
Each BaseUnit BU...B allows access to the supply voltage L+ via terminals (red/blue). The
motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MS1", "BU30-MS2", "BU30-MS3", "BU30-MS4", "BU30-
MS5", "BU30-MS6", "BU30-MS7", "BU30-MS8", "BU30-MS9" and "BU30-MS10" do not have
this access.

Operating principle
1 CPU/interface module 14 Server module

2 BaseUnit BU...D 15 Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2
3 BaseUnit BU...B 16 AUX bus
4 Potential group 1 17 Infeed bus 500 V AC (L1, L2(N), L3, PE)
5 Potential group 2 18 Supply voltage L+
6 Potential group 3 19 Supply voltage L+ (3)
7 BaseUnit BU...B with dummy module 20 Additionally required voltage
8 BaseUnit BU30-MS2 21 Supply voltage L+ (2)
9 BaseUnit BU30-MS4 22 Protective conductor (green/yellow)
10 BaseUnit BU30-MS1 23 Supply voltage L+ (1)
11 Potential group 4 24 Supply voltage 1L+
12 BaseUnit BU30-MS4
13 Backplane bus
Figure 4-4 Placing the BaseUnits
Connecting different potentials to the power or AUX bus
Note
If you apply different potentials to the power or AUX bus within an ET 200SP station, you
need to separate the potential groups with a BaseUnit BU...D.

4.5.2 Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1
Introduction
The AC I/O modules of the ET 200SP are required to connect sensors/actuators with
alternating voltage 24 to 230 V AC.
Requirements
BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B (BU type B1) and
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module
Operating principle
Connect the needed module-dependent alternating voltage for the AC I/O modules directly to
the BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B (terminals 1L, 2L/1N, 2N). Insert the AC I/O modules on
the BaseUnits.
Note
Placing the BaseUnits for AC I/O modules
If you insert an AC I/O module as the first I/O module, then a BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+4B
can also be the first BaseUnit to the right of the CPU/interface module in the ET 200SP
configuration.
The requirement is that you use a CPU as of V3.0 or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
• The BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B do not monitor the connected alternating voltage.
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
• Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during configuration.

① CPU/interface module
② 24 V DC potential group
③ BaseUnits with DC I/O modules
④ BaseUnits BU 20-P12+A0+4B with AC I/O modules
⑤ Direct voltage
⑥ Alternating voltage
Figure 4-5 Placing the BaseUnits for the AC I/O modules
4.5.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules
Introduction
ET 200SP distributed I/O systems can be configured using fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules. This chapter provides an example of a mixed configuration comprising fail-safe and
non-fail-safe modules.

Example of an ET 200SP configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules

In principle, it is not necessary to operate fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules in separate
potential groups. You can divide the modules into fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential groups
and install them.
The figure below shows an example of a configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules within a single ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
① IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

② F-module
③ Non-fail-safe module
④ Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST
⑤ Mixed fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B.
You achieve SIL3/Cat. 4/PLe for the fail-safe modules. No safety category can be achieved
with the non-fail-safe motor starter.
⑥ Non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B
⑦ Fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU20..D, BU15..B and BU30-MSx.
Up to SIL2/Cat. 3/PLd is possible if you disconnect the self-assembling voltage bus and thus
the non-failsafe modules.
⑧ Server module
⑨ Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2
⑩ Fail-safe motor starter F-DS HF
Figure 4-6 ET 200SP - example of a configuration with fail-safe modules

4.5.4 Forming potential groups with motor starters
Overview of the functions of the BaseUnits
24 V 24 V 24 V 500 V 500 V 500 V F-DI F-DI F-DI

infeed continu- trans- infeed continu- trans- infeed continu- routing
ation mission ation mission ation
from left from left from left
module module module
3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0 ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ -- -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0 -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ -- -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0 ✓ -- ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0 -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0EP0 -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0FP0 -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- --
3RK1908-0AP00-0GP0 -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓
3RK1908-0AP00-0HP0 -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ -- ✓ ✓
3RK1908-0AP00-0JP0 -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓
3RK1908-0AP00-0KP0 -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓
✓ Function available
-- Function not available
Properties of the 500 V AC infeed bus

The infeed bus has the following properties:
● The infeed bus is assembled by lining up the motor starter BaseUnits "BU30-MSx".
● The infeed bus distributes the energy to the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter within one
load group.
● You can open load groups by plugging in a 500 V infeed BaseUnit (BU30-MS1, BU30-
MS2, BU30-MS5, BU30-MS7 or BU30-MS8). With BaseUnits BU30-MS3, BU30-MS4,
BU30-MS6, BU30-MS9 or BU30-MS10, you can continue the infeed bus from the left
BaseUnit.
● Via the infeed bus, you have the option of supplying three-phase load groups via L1, L2
and L3 or with single-phase load groups via L and N.
● The permissible voltage range is between 48 and 500 V AC.
● The maximum current carrying capacity is up 32 A (3-phase) at 50 °C and 500 V. Pay
attention to the derating values depending on the configuration.

Properties of the self-assembling voltage bus (L+)

Self-assembling voltage buses have the following properties:
● Maximum current: 7 A
● Rated voltage: 24 V
Pay attention to the derating values depending on the configuration.
The AUX1 bus is not supported in the BaseUnits of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters.
The AUX1 bus is used in ET 200SP motor starters for routing the F-DI signal in BU30-MS7
to BU30-MS10.
WARNING
Electric shock when operating the infeed bus without touch protection cover
There is a risk of electric shock when touching the infeed bus if you have not fitted a touch
protection cover on the infeed bus on the right.
Always fit a touch protection cover on the infeed bus on the right (article number: 3RK1908-
1DA00-2BP0).
WARNING
Electric shock when operating a BaseUnit without an inserted motor starter
If you fit a BaseUnit for motor starters without cover (e.g. option handling), there is a risk of
an electric shock when touching the BaseUnit.
Always fit a cover on the BaseUnit (article number: 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0).
Requirements
Use the following devices to form potential groups with motor starters:
● BaseUnits BU30-MSx
● 3RK1308-0xx00-0CP0 motor starters
Operating principle
Feed in the supply voltage L+ via the BaseUnit BU30-MS1 and BU30-MS3 at the 24V DC
and M terminals.
You can operate the motor starter on a single-phase (L1, N, PE) or a three-phase (L1, L2,
L3, PE) AC voltage system. You connect the required AC voltage directly to the BaseUnits
BU30-MSx (terminals L1, L2(N), L3, PE). You plug the motor starter onto the BaseUnits.
Note
The motor starters' AC power supply is not connected to the AC power supply for the AC I/O
modules (see Chapter "Forming potential groups with BaseUnit type B1 (Page 54)").

4.6 Configuration examples for potential groups
4.6.1 Configuration examples with BaseUnits
Table 4- 5 Configuration examples with BaseUnits
BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-
P16+A0+2D
BU15-
P16+A0+2B
BU15-
P16+A0+2D
BU15-
P16+A0+2B
BU20-
P12+A0+0B

BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-
P16+A10+2D
BU15-
P16+A10+2B

4.6.2 Configuration examples with potential distributor modules
3-wire connection
The potential distributor modules allow for a space-saving design. For a 3-wire connection,
you can, for example, replace two digital input modules with 8 channels on a 141 mm long
BaseUnit with a digital input module with 16 channels and a potential distributor module,
each of which is only 117 mm long.
Note
You must not place a BaseUnit for I/O modules in a PotDis potential group formed with a
light-colored PotDis-BaseUnit.
The figure below shows a configuration example with a DI 16×24VDC ST digital input
module on a BU15-P16+A0+2B BaseUnit and a PotDis-TerminalBlock PotDis-TB-P1-R on a
PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/B-B.
Figure 4-7 Example: 3-wire connection

Supply of external components

Another application of the potential distributor modules is the supply of potentials for external
components. Potential distributor modules enable simple, compact, integrated and clear
design.
Observe the current carrying capacity of each terminal: max. 10 A.
Figure 4-8 Example: Supply of external components

Installation 5
5.1 Basics
Introduction
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are open equipment. This means you
may only install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in housings, cabinets or electrical
operating rooms and in a dry indoor environment (degree of protection IP20). The housings,
cabinets and electrical operating rooms must guarantee protection against electric shock and
spread of fire. The requirements regarding mechanical strength must also be met. The
housings, cabinets, and electrical operating rooms must not be accessible without a key or
tool. Personnel with access must have been trained or authorized.
Installation location
Install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a suitable enclosure/control cabinet with
sufficient mechanical strength and fire protection. Take into account the environmental
conditions for operating the devices.
Mounting position
You can mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall.
The ambient temperature may be restricted in certain installation positions. You will find
more information in the section Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
(Page 282).
Pay attention to chapter "Installation conditions for motor starters (Page 67)" when using
motor starters.

Installation
5.1 Basics
Mounting rail
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on a mounting rail in accordance with EN 60715
(35 × 7.5 mm or 35 × 15 mm).
You need to ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you
install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system from shifting to the side.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed IO system is exposed to increased vibrations and shock, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.
The following are suitable surfaces for the mounting rails:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend these in conjunction with the mounting rails in the
section Accessories/spare parts (Page 291).
Note
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, make sure that they have the
required properties for your ambient climatic conditions.

Installation
5.1 Basics
Minimum clearances
The figure below shows the minimum clearances you must observe when installing or
dismantling the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Figure 5-1 Minimum clearances

Installation
5.1 Basics
General rules for installation
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
tasks.
Observe the following rules:

● Installation starts on the left-hand side with the CPU/interface module.
● A light-colored BaseUnit BU..D0, BU30-MS1 or BU30-MS3 with infeed of supply voltage
L+ follows the CPU/interface module or is placed at the start of each potential group.
If you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (V3.0 or higher), the first BaseUnit in the installation of the
ET 200SP may also be a dark-colored BaseUnit of type B1 or D0.
● This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B, BU30-MS2 or BU30-MS4 (with a dark-colored
terminal box).
● The matching I/O modules / motor starters can be plugged onto the BaseUnits. You will
find matching combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules / motor starters in Application
planning (Page 33).
● The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Note
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system only with disconnected supply voltage.
WARNING
Protection from conductive contamination
Taking into account the environmental conditions, the devices must be protected from
conductive contamination.
This can be achieved, for example, by installing the devices in a control cabinet with the
appropriate degree of protection.

Installation
5.2 Installation conditions for motor starters

Observe the following installation conditions when using an ET 200SP motor starter:
● Mounting position
You can fit the motor starter vertically or horizontally. The mounting position refers to the
alignment of the mounting rail The maximum permissible ambient temperature range
depends on the mounting position:
– Up to 60° C: Horizontal mounting position
– Up to 50° C: Vertical installation position
You also need to consider the current carrying capacity of the ET 200SP components.
In the case of a vertical mounting position, use end retainers "8WA1808" at both ends of
the ET 200SP station:
● Mounting rail
Use one of the following mounting rails:
– 35x15 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 60715
– 35x7.5 mm DIN rail in accordance with DIN EN 60715
– SIMATIC S7 mounting rail
● Current carrying capacity of the ET 200SP station
Current carrying capacity refers to the current load via the power bus and the infeed bus
of the ET 200SP station.
Depending on the ambient conditions and mounting position, you have to take account of the
fan unit or additional mechanical fixings.
Mechanical brackets
Use the mechanical brackets in the following situations:
● When using a 15 mm mounting rail with a single motor starter installation, i.e. no motor
starter mounted directly next to it in the system
● With a vertical mounting position
● For applications according to shipbuilding standards in all mounting positions with 7.5 mm
and 15 mm mounting rails

Installation
Designing interference-free motor starters

For interference-free operation of the ET 200SP station in accordance with standard
IEC 60947-4-2, use a dummy module before the first motor starter. No dummy module is
required to the right of the motor starter.
Note the following mounting rules:
Use the following dummy module on the standard mounting rail between the previous
module and the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
BU cover 15 mm: 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0 with BaseUnit 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0
For operation of the ET 200SP station with an unused BaseUnit, a cover must be provided
for the open BaseUnit plug contacts (power connector, power bus connector, and backplane
bus connector).
The cover protects the plug contacts against dirt. The BU cover can be ordered as an
accessory.
Mount the dummy module

The figure below provides a schematic representation of how to implement measures for
improving interference immunity.
① Interface module ⑥ Motor starter

② Digital input module ⑦ Motor starter
③ Digital output module ⑧ Server module
④ Dummy module ⑨ Infeed bus cover
⑤ Motor starter

Installation
5.3 Mounting the CPU/interface module
NOTICE
Ensure interference immunity
You must not plug any other module into the BaseUnit of the dummy module, otherwise
interference immunity is no longer ensured.
Introduction
The CPU/the interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to the fieldbus
and exchanges the data between the higher-level control system and the I/O modules /
motor starters.
Requirement
The mounting rail is fitted.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for mounting and removing the BusAdapter)

Installation
Mounting the CPU/interface module

Watch the video sequence (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To install a CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CPU/interface module on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU/interface module towards the back until you hear the mounting rail
release button click into place.
Figure 5-2 Mounting the CPU/interface module
Dismantling the CPU/interface module

The CPU/interface module is wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage for the CPU/interface module. Remove the 24 V DC
connector from the CPU/interface module.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit. At the same time, shift the
CPU/interface module parallel to the left until it detaches from the rest of the module
group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU/interface module or
BaseUnit.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU/interface module, swivel the
CPU/interface module off of the mounting rail.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU/interface module.

Installation
5.4 Installing the CM DP communication module
Introduction
You need the CM DP communication module to use the CPU with a DP master or DP slave.
Requirements
● The mounting rail is fitted.
● The CPU is installed.
Installing CM DP
To install the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CM DP to the right of the CPU.
2. Swivel the CM DP towards the back until you hear the mounting rail release button click
into place.
3. Slide the CM DP to the left until you hear it click into the CPU.
Figure 5-3 Installing CM DP

Installation
Removing a CM DP
The CPU and the CM DP are wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU and the CM DP parallel to the left until they detach from the rest of the module
group (clearance about 16 mm).
3. Press the mounting rail release button on the CM DP and move it to the right until it
detaches from the CPU (clearance about 8 mm).
4. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CM DP, swivel the CM DP off of
the mounting rail.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the bus connector from the CM DP unless you have to replace
the CM DP.

Installation
5.5 Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules
Introduction
The BaseUnits are used for electromechanical connection between the individual ET 200SP
components. They also provide terminals for connecting external sensors, actuators and
other devices.
Requirements
The mounting rail is fitted.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the terminal box and the encoding element)
Installing a BaseUnit
Watch "Install configuration" video sequence
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To install a BaseUnit, follow these steps:
1. Hook the BaseUnit onto the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the BaseUnit backwards until you hear it click into place on the mounting rail.
3. Slide the BaseUnit parallel to the left until you hear it latch onto the preceding
CPU/interface module or BaseUnit.
Figure 5-4 Installing a BaseUnit

Installation
Removing a BaseUnit
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
tasks.
To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:

The BaseUnit is wired and there are other BaseUnits to its right and left.
To remove a specific BaseUnit, move the adjacent modules. As soon as you have created a
clearance of about 8 mm from the adjacent BaseUnits, you can remove the BaseUnit.
Note
You can replace the terminal box without removing the BaseUnit. Refer to section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 240).

Installation
To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:

1. Switch off all supply voltages on the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
2. Loosen the wiring on the BaseUnit (with a 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver).
3. Removing (from the right):
Press the mounting rail release on the relevant BaseUnit. Move the BaseUnit parallel to
the right and swivel the BaseUnit off of the mounting rail while pressing the mounting rail
release.
Removing (from the left):
Press the mounting rail release on the relevant BaseUnit and the BaseUnit located to its
right. Move the BaseUnit parallel to the left and swivel the BaseUnit off of the mounting
rail while pressing the mounting rail release.
Note: The mounting rail release is located above the BaseUnit
Figure 5-5 Removing the BaseUnit (removing from the right)

Installation
5.6 Mounting and dismantling BaseUnits for motor starters
Requirements
● The mounting rail is fitted.
● When using a 15 mm mounting rail, you must install the additional mechanical mounting
(3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0).
Note
Mechanical bracket for BaseUnit
You will find out how to mount the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit in chapter
"Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit (Page 82)".
CAUTION
Protection against electrostatic charge
When handling and installing the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, ensure protection
against electrostatic charging of the components. Changes to the system configuration and
wiring are only permissible after disconnection from the power supply.
Mounting a BaseUnit
Proceed as follows to mount a BaseUnit for motor starters:
1. Hook the BaseUnit into the DIN rail from above.
2. Swing the BaseUnit to the rear until the BaseUnit audibly engages.

Installation
3. Slide the individual BaseUnits to the left to the previous BaseUnit until they audibly
engage.
Assemble the BaseUnits only on the DIN rail.
Note
The BaseUnits for motor starters can be plugged together with the BaseUnits for I/O
modules.
Disassembling the BaseUnit
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
tasks.
To disassemble the BaseUnit, proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect the main power supply and the control current supply of the SIMATIC ET
200SP motor starter.
2. Actuate the DIN rail release on the BaseUnit of the motor starter.
3. Move the BaseUnit to the left. As soon as there is a clearance of approximately 8 mm to
the neighboring BaseUnits, you can disassemble the BaseUnit of the motor starter.
4. Swing the BaseUnit away from the DIN rail while pressing the DIN rail release.

Installation
5.7 Installing potential distributor modules
5.7 Installing potential distributor modules
Introduction
You use the potential distributor module to distribute a variety of potentials (P1, P2).
Requirements
The mounting rail is installed.
Installing and uninstalling PotDis-BaseUnit

You install/uninstall PotDis-BaseUnits as you would the BaseUnits for I/O modules. You can
find additional information in section Mounting BaseUnits for I/O modules (Page 73).
Installing and uninstalling PotDis-TerminalBlock
Installing
Plug the PotDis-TerminalBlock in die PotDis-BaseUnit. Proceed exactly as described in
Section Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers (Page 116).
Uninstalling
To remove a PotDis-TerminalBlock, follow these steps:
1. Switch off all supply voltages on the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
2. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the PotDis-TerminalBlock.
3. Remove the PotDis-TerminalBlock from the front of the PotDis-BaseUnit.

Installation
5.8 Installing the server module
5.8 Installing the server module
Introduction
The server module on the far right of the assembly/line completes the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
Requirement
The last BaseUnit is mounted.
Installing the server module

Watch "Install configuration" video sequence
Proceed as follows to install a server module:
1. Hook the server module onto the mounting rail to the right of the last BaseUnit.
2. Swivel the server module backwards on the mounting rail.
3. Move the server module parallel to the left until you hear it latch onto the last BaseUnit
that precedes it.
Figure 5-6 Installing the server module
Removing the server module

Proceed as follows to remove a server module:
1. Press the mounting rail release button on the server module.
2. Move the server module parallel to the right.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button, swivel the server module off the
mounting rail.

Installation
5.9 Mounting further accessories for motor starters
5.9.1 Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus
Introduction
The 500 V infeed bus connects all SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters. For finger-safe
termination of the infeed bus, you must use the cover.
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Hazardous electrical voltage causes electric shock, burns and property damage.
tasks.
DANGER
Infeed bus - electric shock
You must provide the infeed bus with a touch protection cover on the right (Article No.:
3RK1308-1DA00-2BP0).
Failure to do so will result in the danger of electric shock.
WARNING
Personal injury may occur
On the last plugged-in BaseUnit of a motor starter, place a cover on the opening of the
contacts of the infeed bus.

Installation
Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount the infeed bus cover on a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
1. Press the cover onto the opening of the BaseUnit on the right until it audibly engages.
The cover can be removed again using 2 fingers and without tools.

Installation
5.9.2 Mounting the mechanical bracket for the BaseUnit
Introduction
To achieve higher stability, you can use a mechanical bracket on 7.5 mm and 15 mm
mounting rails.
You must use the mechanical bracket in the following situations:

● When using a 15 mm mounting rail
● With a vertical mounting position
● For applications according to shipbuilding standards in all mounting positions with 7.5 mm
and 15 mm mounting rails
You can find further information on the mechanical bracket in chapter "Installation conditions
for motor starters (Page 67)".

Installation
Procedure
To mount the mechanical bracket, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the mechanical bracket into the opening at the bottom of the BaseUnit.
You use the same mechanical bracket for both mounting rails, rotated through 180°
respectively.
2. Hook the BaseUnit into the mounting rail.

3. Insert the mechanical bracket into the BaseUnit.
4. Screw the mechanical bracket securely onto the mounting panel. Use an M4 screw and a
suitable washer.

Installation
The figures below show the mechanical bracket after installation on a 7.5 mm or 15 mm
mounting rail.

Installation
5.9.3 Mounting the BU cover
Introduction
BU covers are plugged onto BaseUnits whose slots have been reserved for future expansion
(as empty slots). The BU covers for motor starters serve as touch protection covers for
unoccupied slots.
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Hazardous electrical voltage causes electric shock, burns and property damage.
tasks.
DANGER
BaseUnit without motor starter - electric shock
If you install a BaseUnit without motor starter in the ET 200SP system (e.g. options
handling), you must provide the BaseUnit with a BU cover (Article No: 3RK1908-1CA00-
0BP0).
Failure to do so will result in the danger of electric shock.
Procedure
To mount the BU cover onto a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, insert the BU cover in the
BaseUnit in parallel until both interlocks audibly engage.

Wiring 6
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation
Introduction
When installing the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations need to be adhered to depending on the area of application.
This section provides an overview of the most important rules that must be observed for the
integration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a plant or system.
Specific application
Adhere to the safety and accident prevention regulations applying to specific applications, for
example machine protection guidelines.
EMERGENCY STOP devices

EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
must remain effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.
Excluding hazardous plant states

Hazardous operating states must not occur when
● the plant restarts after a voltage dip or power failure.
● Bus communication is reestablished following a fault.
If necessary, EMERGENCY STOP must be forced!
An uncontrolled or undefined startup must not occur after the EMERGENCY STOP is
unlocked.
Line voltage
Below, everything you need to consider in terms of line voltage is described (refer to section
Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage (Page 286)):
● For fixed plants or systems without an all-pole mains disconnection switch, a mains
disconnection device (all-pole) must be available in the building installation.
● For load power supplies, the configured rated voltage range must correspond to the local
line voltage.
● For all power circuits of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the fluctuation/deviation of
the line voltage from the rated value must be within the permitted tolerance.

Wiring
6.1 Rules and regulations for operation
24 V DC supply
Below you will find a description of what you need to pay attention to with 24 V DC supply:
● For buildings: In the event of danger through overload, you must provide lightning
protection measures for external lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements).
● For 24 V DC supply lines and signal lines: If there is a risk of overvoltages, you need to
take precautions to ensure internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements,
refer to section Accessories/spare parts (Page 291)).
● For 24 V DC supply: Ensure protection by electrical separation and separate cable
routing or increased insulation of circuits with dangerous potentials from extra low voltage
(SELV/PELV) in accordance with IEC 61131-2 / IEC 61010-2-201.
Requirements for power supplies in the event of voltage interruption
Note
To ensure adherence to IEC 61131-2 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21, only use power
packs/power supply units (230 V AC → 24 V DC) with a mains buffering time of at least
20 ms. Observe the relevant requirement in your product standards (e.g. 30 ms for "burners"
pursuant to EN 298) as regards possible voltage interruptions. The latest up-to-date
information on PS components is available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
These requirements, of course, also apply to power packs/power supply units not
constructed using ET 200SP or S7-300-/400-/1500 technology.
Protection against outside electrical influences

Below is a description of what you must pay attention to in terms of protection against
electrical impacts and/or faults:
● Make sure that the system for discharging electromagnetic interference is connected to a
functional earth or to protective conductor with a sufficient cross-section for all plants with
an ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● For supply, signal and bus lines, you must ensure that the laying of the lines and the
installation is correct.
● For signal and bus lines, you must ensure that a wire/cable break or a cross-circuit does
not lead to undefined states of the plant or system.
Reference
You can find more information in the Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual.

Wiring
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules
6.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP
with fail-safe modules
6.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) for failsafe modules and failsafe motor
starters
WARNING
The failsafe modules must be operated with safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV).
You can find more information on safety extra-low voltage (SELV, PELV) in the data sheets
of the applicable power supplies, for example.
The fail-safe modules operate with the 24 V DC rated voltage. The tolerance range is
19.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC.
The fail-safe motor starters operate with the 24 V DC rated voltage. The tolerance range is
20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC.
Within the overvoltage range from 32 V DC to 36 V DC, the F-modules react in a fail-safe
manner and the inputs and outputs are passivated. For overvoltages greater than 36 V DC,
the F-modules are permanently de-energized.
Use a power supply unit that does not exceed Um = 36 V DC even in the event of a fault.
For more on this, refer to the information in the data sheet on overvoltage protection in the
case of an internal error. Or implement appropriate measures to limit the voltage, e.g. use
of an overvoltage protector.
All system components that can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill
this condition.
Each additional circuit (24 V DC) used in the system must have a safety extra-low voltage
(SELV, PELV). Refer to the relevant data sheets or contact the manufacturer.
Sensors and actuators with an external power supply can also be connected to F-modules.
Make sure that power is supplied to these components from safety extra-low voltage
(SELV, PELV) as well. The process signal of a 24 V DC digital module may not exceed a
fault voltage Um in the event of a fault.
WARNING
Even when a fault occurs, the permissible potential difference between the supply of the
interface module (bus voltage) and the load voltage must not be exceeded.
An external direct electrical connection is one way to meet this requirement. This also
prevents potential differences from causing voltage additions at the individual voltage
sources, which would cause the fault voltage Um to be exceeded.

Wiring
6.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules and fail-safe
motor starters
General requirements for sensors and actuators

Note the following important warning regarding safety-related use of sensors and actuators:
WARNING
Note that instrumentation with sensors and actuators bears a considerable safety
responsibility. Also bear in mind that sensors and actuators generally do not have proof-test
intervals of 20 years as defined in IEC 61508:2010 without considerable loss of safety.
The probability of hazardous faults and the rate of hazardous faults of safety functions must
comply with an SIL-defined high limit. A listing of values achieved by F-modules in the
technical specifications of the F-modules is available under "Fail-safe performance
characteristics".
To achieve the required safety class, suitably qualified sensors and actuators are
necessary.
Additional sensor requirements

General rule: To achieve SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe, a single-channel sensor is adequate. However, to
achieve SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe with a single-channel sensor, the sensor itself must be
SIL3/Cat. 3/PLe-capable; otherwise the sensor must be connected by two channels to
achieve this safety level.
To achieve SIL3/Cat. 4/PLe, sensors must be connected by two channels.
WARNING
In the case of fail-safe input modules, the value "0" is output to the F-CPU after detection of
faults. You therefore need to make sure that the sensors are implemented in such a way as
to ensure the reliable reaction of the safety program when the sensor is in the "0" state.
Example: In its safety program, an EMERGENCY-STOP sensor must achieve the
shutdown of the relevant actuator when it is in the "0" state (EMERGENCY-STOP button
pressed).

Wiring
Additional requirements for sensors for fail-safe motor starters

Only single-channel sensors that fulfill the required safety category themselves may be
connected to the fail-safe motor starter's F-DI. Fail-safe laying must be observed in
accordance with the required safety category.
WARNING
Safety-related shutdown using the F-DI
Depending on the I/O used, the shutdown takes place via one or two output channels
(terminals):
• PM-switching: The shutdown takes place via two output channels.
• PP-switching: The shutdown takes place via one output channel.
Shutdown via only one output channel (PP-switching) achieves SIL 3 according to
EN 62061, PL e / Cat. 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1, if it is ensured that the cabling is
installed in a cross-circuit-proof/P-short-circuit-proof manner.
Duration requirements for sensor signals
WARNING
Observe the following requirements for sensor signals:

• To ensure the correct detection of the sensor signals via fail-safe modules with inputs,
you need to make sure that the sensor signals are output for a minimum duration.
• For pulses to be detected with certainty, the time between two signal changes (pulse
duration) must be greater than the PROFIsafe monitoring time.
Reliable detection by F-modules with inputs

The minimum duration of sensor signals for F-modules with inputs depends on the
configured input delay, the parameters of the short circuit test of the sensor supplies, and the
configured discrepancy behavior for 1oo2 evaluation. The signal must be greater than the
maximum response time of the configured application. Information on calculating the
maximum response time can be found in the section "Response times" of the relevant F-
module.
The maximum permitted switching frequency of the sensor signals results from the minimum
duration.

Wiring
Additional requirements for actuators

The fail-safe output modules test the outputs at regular intervals. The F-module briefly
switches off the activated outputs and, if necessary, switches on the deactivated outputs.
You can assign the maximum duration of the test pulses (dark and light period) with
parameters.
Fast reacting actuators may briefly drop out or be activated during the test. If your process
does not tolerate this, set the pulse duration of the light or dark test correspondingly or use
actuators that have sufficient lag.
WARNING
If the actuators switch voltages greater than 24 V DC (e.g. 230 V AC), the outputs of a fail-
safe output module and the parts carrying a higher voltage must be electrically isolated (in
accordance with IEC 60664-1).
This is generally the case for relays and contactors. Particular attention must be paid to this
with semiconductor switching devices.
Technical specifications of sensors and actuators

Refer to the manuals of the fail-safe modules for technical specifications to assist you in
selecting sensors and actuators.
6.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals

When fail-safe digital output and input signals are in a single cable, F-DQ modules and F-
PM-E modules may experience readback errors.
Cause: capacitive crosstalk
During the bit pattern test of the outputs or the sensor supply of the inputs, the steep
switching edge of the output drivers caused by the coupling capacitance of the line may
result in crosstalk to other non-activated output or input channels. This may then lead to a
response of the readback circuit in these channels. A cross circuit/short-circuit is detected,
which leads to safety-related tripping.
Remedy:
● Separate cables for F-DI modules, F-DQ modules, and F-PM-E modules or non-fail-safe
DQ modules
● Separate cables for F-DQ channel and F-DI channels for the F-PM-E module
● Coupling relay or diodes in the outputs
● Disable the sensor supply test if safety class requirements allow it.
Cause: magnetic crosstalk
Note that an inductive load connected to the F-DQ channels can induce coupling of a strong
magnetic field.
Remedy:
● Separate the inductive loads spatially or shield against the magnetic field.
● Configure the readback time to 50 ms or higher.

Wiring
6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters
6.3 Additional rules and instructions for operation with motor starters
6.3.1 Protection against short circuit

The motor starter complies with type of coordination 1. Secure the feeder cable for the infeed
bus according to current, country-specific rules for conductor protection.
WARNING
Hazardous Voltage at the Motor
Following a short-circuit, the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is defective. Replace the
motor starter following a short-circuit.
6.4 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply
Introduction
Below you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200SP distributed I/O
system on a grounded incoming supply (e.g. TN-S network). The specific subjects discussed
are:
● Disconnecting devices and short-circuit and overload protection according to IEC 60364
(corresponds to DIN VDE 0100) and IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
● Load power supplies and load circuits.
Grounded incoming supply

In the case of grounded incoming supplies (TN-S system) the neutral conductor (N) and the
protective conductor (PE) are each grounded. Both conductors form a part of the overvoltage
concept. When a plant is in operation, the current flows across the neutral conductor. When
a fault occurs, for example, a single ground fault between a live conductor and ground, the
current flows through the protective conductor.
Safe electrical separation (SELV in accordance with IEC 61131-2 or IEC 61010-2-201)
Load power supplies/power supply modules with 24 V DC output voltage require safe
electrical separation and voltage limiting (extra low voltage). Load power supplies/power
supply modules with 24 V DC output voltage are not connected to the protective conductor.
According to IEC 61131-2 and IEC 61010-2-201, this protection is referred to as SELV
(Safety Extra Low Voltage).
The wiring of SELV circuits must be safely separated from the wiring of other circuits that are
not SELV, or the insulation of all conductors must be dimensioned for the higher voltage.

Wiring
Grounded extra-low voltage (PELV in accordance with IEC 61131-2 or IEC 61010-2-201)
Load power supplies/power supply modules with grounded 24 V DC output voltage require
safe connection to the protective conductor and voltage limiting (extra low voltage).
According to IEC 61131-2 and IEC 61010-2-201, this protection is referred to as PELV
(Protective Extra Low Voltage).
The wiring of PELV circuits must be safely separated from the wiring of other circuits that are
not PELV, or the insulation of all conductors must be dimensioned for the higher voltage.
Configuration of ET 200SP with ungrounded reference potential

To conduct interference currents, the reference potential of the CPU/interface module and
the BaseUnits BU15...D is connected internally via an RC combination (IM/CPU:
R = 10 MΩ / C = 100 nF, BU15...D: R = 10 MΩ / C = 4 nF) with the mounting rail (functional
grounding).
● This configuration conducts high-frequency interference currents and prevents static
charges.
● It is always possible to configure an ungrounded setup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system as the ET 200SP distributed I/O system has no fixed ground connection. The
power pack/power supply module for 24 V DC must also be ungrounded and electrically
isolated.
If you want to configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with grounded reference
potential, connect the 1M connection of the CPU/interface module electrically with the
protective conductor.
Short-circuit / overload protection

Various measures as protection against short-circuits and overloads are required for setting
up a full installation. The type of components and the binding protective measures depend
on which IEC (DIN VDE) regulation applies to your system configuration. The table refers to
the figure below and compares the IEC (DIN VDE) regulations.
Table 6- 1 Components and protective measures
Refer to figure IEC 60364 (DIN VDE 0100) IEC 60204 (DIN VDE 0113)
Disconnecting device for controller, ① Main switch Disconnector
sensors, and actuators
Short-circuit / overload protection: ② Single-pole protection of With grounded secondary
In groups for sensors and actuators circuits circuit: single-pole protection
otherwise: all-pole protection
③
Load current supply for AC load cir- ② Galvanic isolation by trans- Galvanic isolation by trans-
cuits with more than five items of former recommended former recommended
electromagnetic equipment

Wiring
Cable temperature measurement threshold
Note
When choosing a cable, remember that the cable temperature in operation can be up to
30 °C higher than the ambient temperature of the ET200SP system (example: at an ambient
temperature of 60 °C, a connection conductor must be dimensioned for a temperature range
of at least 90 °C).
You should specify other connection types and material requirements based on the electrical
characteristics of the circuits you use and the installation environment.

Wiring
ET 200SP in the overall configuration

The figure below shows the overall configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(load current supply and grounding concept) with supply from a TN-S network.
① Main switch
② Short-circuit / overload protection
③ The load current supply (galvanic isolation)
Figure 6-1 ET 200SP in the overall configuration

Wiring
6.5 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP
Electrical isolation
Electrical relationships
With the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, there is electrical isolation between:
● The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
● The communication interfaces of the CPU (PROFINET) or of the interface module
(PROFINET/PROFIBUS) and all other circuit components.
The figures below show the electrical relationships of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
with the CPU and the interface module. Only the most important components are
represented in the figures.
Figure 6-2 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with CPU

Wiring
Figure 6-3 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with interface module (using IM 155-6 PN ST as an example)

Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules
6.6 Wiring rules
Wiring rules for the CPU/interface module and BaseUnits for I/O modules
Wiring rules for ... CPU/interface module (supply BaseUnits

voltage) (push-in terminal)
Permitted cable cross-sections of solid cables (Cu) 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
AWG*: 24 to 13
Permitted cable Without end sleeve 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
cross-sections of AWG*: 24 to 13 AWG*: 24 to 14
flexible cables (Cu)
With end sleeve (with plas- 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm2** 0.14 mm to 1.5 mm2
tic sleeve)*** AWG*: 24 to 16 AWG*: 26 to 16
With TWIN end sleeve*** 0.5 mm to 1 mm2 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 (see below)
AWG*: 20 to 17 AWG*: 20 to 18
Stripping length of the wires 8 to 10 mm
End sleeves in accordance with DIN 46228 with 8 and 10 mm long
plastic sleeve***
* AWG: American Wire Gauge

** End sleeves without plastic sleeve: 0.25 to 2.5 mm2/AWG: 24 to 13
*** See note on end sleeves
Note the following for BaseUnits with function version < FS10:
Note
End sleeves
Optimum results with respect to a high-quality and permanent electrical connection with
maximum conductor pull forces at the same time can be achieved by using crimping dies,
preferably with smooth surfaces, which are provided, for example, with rectangular and
trapezoidal crimp cross-sections.
Crimping dies with a pronounced wave profile are unsuitable.

Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules
TWIN end sleeves for the cables of the I/O modules' push-in terminals
Due to the space required by TWIN end sleeves with 0.75 mm2 cross-section, you must
ensure a correct angle for the cable arrangement when crimping the TWIN end sleeve so
that the cables are optimally arranged.
① Cross-section of the terminal compartment

② Crimping TWIN end sleeves at the correct angle
Figure 6-4 TWIN end sleeves
Wiring rules for motor starters
Wiring rules for ... L1(L), L2(N), L3, T1, T2, T3, PE, 24 V DC, F-DI, DI1 ... DI3, LC, M, 24 V
PE M OUT
Permitted cable cross-sections of solid 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
cables (Cu) AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
Permitted cable Without end 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
cross-sections of sleeve AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
flexible cables (Cu)
With end sleeve 1 to 6 mm2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2
AWG: 18 to 10 AWG: 20 to 12 AWG: 24 to 16
With end sleeve 1 to 4 mm2 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 0.75 mm2
(with plastic AWG: 18 to 11 AWG: 20 to 16 AWG: 24 to 18
sleeve)
Stripping length of the wires 15 mm 10 mm 8 mm
End sleeves according to DIN 46228 15 mm long 10 mm long 8 mm long
with plastic sleeve
Safety standards for fail-safe motor starters

Fail-safe motor starters fulfill the following standards under certain conditions:
● PL e/Cat. 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1
● Safety Integrity Level SILCL3 acc. to IEC 62061
To fulfill both standards, lay cross-circuit proof and P-cross-circuit proof control cables from
the safe output of a sensor or F-DQ to the safe input of the motor starter, e.g. as a
separately sheathed cable or in a separate cable duct.

Wiring
6.6 Wiring rules
Line protection
The line protection of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is provided for the motor
outgoing feeder cable when the following condition is met:
The cross-section of the motor outgoing feeder cable must be dimensioned for the load
ratios of the motor and for the cable-laying method.
Comply with national regulations. The user is responsible for the correct selection and
dimensioning of the motor connection cable to DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0298-4 and/or
UL 508.
The conductor protection for the incoming feeders must be ensured by the owner of the
installation depending on the cross-section.
Note
When choosing a cable, remember that the cable temperature in operation can be up to
30 °C higher than the ambient temperature of the ET200SP system (example: at an ambient
temperature of 60 °C, a connection conductor must be dimensioned for a temperature range
of at least 90 °C).
You should specify other connection types and material requirements based on the electrical
characteristics of the circuits you use and the installation environment.

Wiring
6.7 Wiring BaseUnits for I/O modules
Introduction
The BaseUnits connect the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to the process. The following
versions of the BaseUnits can be used:
● BaseUnits (with light-colored terminal box) for opening a potential group: BU..D
● BaseUnits (with dark-colored terminal box) for extending the potential group: BU..B
● BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals or additional terminals: BU..+10..
● BaseUnits with integrated thermal resistor for compensation of the reference junction
temperature when connecting thermocouples: BU..T
● PotDis-BaseUnits (with light-colored terminal box) for opening a PotDis potential group:
PotDis-BU..D
● PotDis-BaseUnits (with dark-colored terminal box) for extending the potential group:
PotDis-BU..B
① Push-in terminal
② Spring release
③ Measuring probe (suitable probes: 1 mm diameter, length ≥ 10 mm while observing the
permitted voltage category)
④ Holder for shield connection
Figure 6-5 View of the BaseUnit
Note
The pin assignment of the BaseUnit depends on the connected I/O module. Information
on the BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the associated manuals.
Replacement of the terminal box on the BaseUnit is described in the section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 240).

Wiring
Note
Special terminal designations in the wiring and block diagrams of the I/O
modules/BaseUnits
• RES: Reserve, these terminals must remain unconnected so that they can be used for
future expansions
• n.c.: Not connected, these terminals have no function. However, they can be
connected to potentials specifically defined for a module, for example, for the laying
unused wires.
Requirements
● The supply voltages are turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules.
● Color identification labels (Page 127) (optional) have been applied.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver
Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without wire end ferrule, multi-wire (stranded) with wire
end ferrule or ultrasonically sealed
Watch the video sequence (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors (except for 2.5 mm² cross-section):
Seal or crimp the wire with wire end ferrules.
3. Insert the wire into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without wire end ferrule, unprocessed

To connect a wire without a wire end ferrule, follow these steps:
2. Push with the screwdriver into the spring release.
3. Insert the wire into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring release.

Wiring
6.8 Connecting cable shields for I/O modules
Removing wires
Using the screwdriver, press the spring release of the terminal as far as it will go and pull out
the wire.
Note
When you press the spring release, you should not pull on the wire/cable at the same time.
This prevents you from damaging the terminal.
Introduction
● You need the shield connector to contact cable shields (e.g. for analog modules). The
shield connector conducts interference currents on cable shields to ground via the
mounting rail. It is not necessary to contact the shield at where the cable enters the
cabinet.
● Attach the shield connector to the BaseUnit.
● The shield connector consists of a shield contact and a shield terminal.
● The shield connector is automatically connected to the functional ground (FG) of the
mounting rail after installation.
Requirements
● BaseUnit with a width of 15 mm
● The shield terminal is suitable for cables with max. ∅ 7 mm each.
Figure 6-6 Shield terminal

Wiring
Required tools
● Stripping tool
Procedure
Watch the "Wiring BaseUnits" video sequence
To connect the cable shield, follow these steps:
1. If necessary, connect the supply voltage L+ and ground to the BaseUnit.
2. Press the shield contact up into the mount until you hear it click into place.
3. Remove the cable insulation material around the shield terminal.
Connect the cable to the BaseUnit and place the cable in the shield contact.
4. Insert the shield terminal into the shield contact.
5. Tighten the shield terminal with approximately 0.5 Nm.
① Mount ⑤ Insulation material removed (approx. 20 mm)

② Supply voltage L+, ground ⑥ Cable to the encoder
③ Shield contact ⑦ Shield terminal
④ Flat connector for push-on contacts
(6.3 × 0.8 mm)
Figure 6-7 Mounting the shield contact

Wiring
6.9 Wiring BaseUnits for motor starters
Introduction
The following versions of BaseUnits can be used:
● BU30-MS1 (with 24 V DC and 500 V AC infeed)
● BU30-MS2 (with 500 V AC infeed)
● BU30-MS3 (with 24 V DC infeed)
● BU30-MS4 (without infeed)
● BU30-MS5 (with 500 V AC infeed and single F-DI)
● BU30-MS6 (without infeed and with single F-DI)
● BU30-MS7 (with F-DI and 500 V AC infeed)
● BU30-MS8 (with 500 V AC infeed and F-DI routing)
● BU30-MS9 (with F-DI routing)
● BU30-MS10 (with F-DI infeed)
The following figure shows an example of a BaseUnit BU30-MS1 (with the maximum number
of terminals):
② Spring release
Figure 6-8 Terminals on a BaseUnit BU30-MS1

Wiring
The following figure shows an example of a BaseUnit BU30-MS5 (with the maximum number
of terminals):
② Spring release
Figure 6-9 Terminals on a BaseUnit BU30-MS5
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.
For wiring finely-stranded or stranded conductors without end sleeves on push-in

connections, a screwdriver is required.

Wiring
Requirements
● The supply voltages are switched off
● Observe the wiring rules
NOTICE
Interconnection of the F-DI input of BaseUnits BU-30-MS5, BU-30-MS6, BU-30-MS7
and BU-30-MS10 with surge filters
If your system requires overvoltage protection, you must interconnect the F-DI input of
the BaseUnits BU-30-MS5, BU-30-MS6, BU-30-MS7 and BU-30-MS10 with surge filters.
Please see "Electromagnetic Compatibility" in the technical specifications.
Required tools
Use the screwdriver "SZF 1-0.6x3.5" (for finely-stranded cables only).
Connecting conductors: Solid without end sleeve, stranded (stranded wire) with end sleeve
To connect a cable, proceed as follows:
1. Insulate the cables in accordance with the table in chapter "Electromagnetic compatibility
of fail-safe modules (Page 278)".
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors:
Crimp the cable with end sleeves.
3. Insert the cable into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Pull on the cable to ensure it is tight.
Connecting conductors: multi-wire (stranded), without end sleeve, unfinished

To connect a cable, proceed as follows:
1. Insulate the cables in accordance with the table in chapter "Wiring rules (Page 98)".
2. Press the screwdriver into the spring release.
3. Insert the conductor into the push-in terminal until it engages.
5. Check whether or not the conductor is firmly connected by pulling on the cable.
Video sequence
At the following Internet link, you can see a video about connecting conductors: Wire
BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)

Wiring
Releasing conductors
To release a conductor, proceed as follows:
1. Press the screwdriver into the spring release of the terminal until it engages.
2. Pull the conductor out.
Note
When pressing the spring release, you must not pull on the wire/cable at the same time. In
this way, you avoid damaging the terminal.

Wiring
6.10 Connecting the 3DI/LC module for the motor starter

You will find further information on the 3DI/LC module in the ET 200SP motor starter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479973) manual.
Procedure
The figure below shows the connections of the 3DI/LC module.
① Digital input 3
② Digital input 2
③ Digital input 1
④ Local control (manual local)
⑤ Ground
⑥ 24 V DC/ 100 mA output
Note
The digital inputs (1 to 4) are not isolated. The reference potential is M (5). Control the digital
inputs only via a unit supplied from the 24 V DC output (6).
Connect only cables of a width not exceeding 30 m to the 3DI/LC module.
The supply (5 and 6) is protected against short-circuits.

Wiring
Terminal sketch of the 3DI/LC module

The following diagram shows a terminal sketch of the 3DI/LC module:
Figure 6-10 Connection example of inputs

Wiring
6.11 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module
Introduction
The supply voltage of the CPU/interface module is supplied by means of a 4-pin connector
plug located on the front of the CPU/interface module.
Power supply unit

Only use power supply units of type SELV/PELV with safe electrically isolated functional
extra low voltage (≤ 28.8 V DC).
Connection for supply voltage (X80)

The connections have the following meaning:
① Ground of the supply voltage

② Ground of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
③ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
④ Spring release
⑤ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage
1L+ and 2L+ and 1M and 2M are internally jumpered.
Figure 6-11 Supply voltage connection
The maximum cross-section of the connection is 2.5 mm2 without wire-end ferrule or
1.5 mm2 with wire-end ferrule. A strain relief is not present. The connector plugs provide you
with the option of looping the supply voltage through without interruption, even when it is
unplugged.
Requirements
● Only wire up the connector plug when the supply voltage is turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules (Page 98).
Required tools

Wiring
Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without end sleeve, multi-wire (stranded) with end sleeve
or ultrasonically sealed
Watch video sequence: "Connect BusAdapter to the interface module"
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
2. Only in the case of stranded conductors:
Seal or crimp the wire with end sleeves.
3. Insert the cable into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the plug socket of the interface module.
Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without end sleeve, unfinished

To connect a wire without an end sleeve, follow these steps:
2. Using a screwdriver, press the spring release and insert the wire into the push-in terminal
as far as it will go.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the socket in the interface module.
Removing a wire
Using the screwdriver, press the spring release as far as it will go and pull out the wire.

Wiring
6.12 Connecting interfaces for communication

Connect the communication interfaces of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system using the
standardized connector or directly. If you want to prepare communication cables yourself,
the interface assignment is specified in the manuals of the corresponding modules. Observe
the mounting instructions for the connectors.
Detailed information on the available BusAdapters and the procedure for connecting
PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module is available in the BusAdapter
6.12.1 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU
Introduction
You use the RJ-45 bus connector to connect PROFINET IO (port P3) directly to the CPU.
Required accessories
● Cable ties with standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm for strain relief
● Please observe the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide
(http://www.profibus.com).
Mounting the bus connector

Mount the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET
Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com).

Wiring
Procedure
Insert the RJ45 bus connector into the PROFINET port (port P3) on the CPU.
Note
Cable support and strain relief
If you are using a FastConnect RJ45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet (6GK1901-1BB20-
2AA0), we recommend you provide strain relief for the PROFINET connecting cable. For this
you need a cable tie with a standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm.
Use it to fasten the PROFINET connecting cable directly after it exits the bus connector to
the provided cable support on the CPU (on the front directly below the PROFINET interface
X1P3).
① CPU
② PROFINET connecting cable
③ Strain relief (cable tie)
④ Cable support
⑤ FastConnect RJ45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet
⑥ PROFINET connector (port P3)
Figure 6-12 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU

Wiring
6.12.2 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface

module/communications module CM DP
Introduction
Using the bus connector (RS485), connect the PROFIBUS DP to the interface
module/communications module CM DP.
Required tools
Procedure
To connect the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module / DP communication module
CM DP, follow these steps:
1. Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the bus connector.
2. Plug the bus connector into the PROFIBUS DP connector.
3. Securely tighten the fixing screws of the bus connector (0.3 Nm).
① Interface module
② PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector
③ PROFIBUS connecting cable
④ Communications module CM DP
Figure 6-13 Connect PROFIBUS DP to the interface module/communications module CM DP

Wiring
6.13 Inserting I/O modules / motor starters and BU covers
Reference
You can find additional information on the PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector in the
corresponding product information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58648998).
Introduction
● You insert the I/O modules on the BaseUnits. The I/O modules are self-coding and type-
coded.
● You insert the PotDis-TerminalBlocks on the PotDis-BaseUnits.
● You insert the BU covers on BaseUnits whose slots are not equipped with I/O
modules/PotDis-TerminalBlocks.
● You insert the BU covers on BaseUnits whose slots have been reserved for future
expansion (as empty slots).
● The BU covers for motor starters serve as touch protection covers for unoccupied slots.
The BU covers have a holder for the reference identification label on the inside. For future
expansion of the ET 200SP, remove the reference identification label from the holder and
insert it into the final I/O module.
It is not possible to attach a reference identification label to the BU cover itself.
There are three versions:
– BU cover with a width of 15 mm
– BU cover with a width of 20 mm
– BU cover with a width of 30 mm (for motor starters)
Requirement
Refer to chapter "Application planning (Page 33)".

Wiring
Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers

Watch video sequence: "Insert I/O modules"
Insert the I/O module or BU cover parallel into the BaseUnit until you hear both latches click
into place.
Figure 6-14 Plugging in I/O modules or BU covers (using an I/O module as example)

Wiring
6.14 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters
6.14.1 Mounting the fan
Procedure
Proceed as follows to mount a fan on a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter:
1. Slide the fan onto the motor starter until you can hear the fan engage.
Observe the blowing direction of the fan when mounting. The air stream must be directed
to the inside of the motor starter. The correct blowing direction is indicated by arrows on
the bottom of the fan.
2. Insert the connection plug into the opening above the fan.
3. Secure the fan cable to the fixing eyes on the right-hand side of the fan cover.
Note
Specified ambient temperatures are not reached if the fan is incorrectly installed
If you do not observe the blowing direction of the fan when mounting, the specified ambient
temperatures will not be reached. The device shuts down prematurely due to excessively
high temperature.

Wiring
6.14.2 Mounting/disassembly of motor starters
Procedure
CAUTION
To assemble a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, proceed as follows:

● Position the mechanical interlock of the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter in the
assembly/disassembly position ②
● Place the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter onto the BaseUnit.
● Turn the mechanical interlock clockwise to the parking position ③
● Turn the mechanical interlock counterclockwise to the operating position (= end
position) ①
① ② ③

Wiring
① Operating position/READY
The motor starter is firmly locked in the BaseUnit, and all electrical contacts are connected.
② Assembly/disassembly position
All electrical contacts are open, and you can use the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter in the
BaseUnit, or you can remove it from the BaseUnit.
③ Parking position/OFF
In this position, you cannot remove the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter
from the BaseUnit, but all electrical contacts are open. In addition, you can
open the locking lever on the mechanical rotary interlock in this position,
and fix the position with a padlock (shackle diameter 3 mm). This ensures
the isolating function in accordance with IEC 60947-1.
In the parking position, the motor starter counts as a disconnected element
for the head module. During operation, the parking position is therefore a
hot swapping state. See also Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor
starters (hot swapping) (Page 233)
Note
Parking position/OFF
This position is only permissible for maintenance purposes and not for continuous operation.
In this position, dust protection and mechanical durability are not ensured.
If you do not use the motor starter for an extended period, remove it and attach the BU cover
(3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0).
Mount the touch protection cover for the infeed bus on the last BaseUnit.
Note
Touch protection cover for the infeed bus
You will find out how to mount the touch protection cover of the infeed bus on a SIMATIC
ET 200SP motor starter in chapter "Mounting the cover for the 500 V AC infeed bus
(Page 80)".

Wiring
To connect the assembly, mount the server module after the last BaseUnit.
Note
Server module
You can find out how to assemble/disassemble the server module in chapter "Installing the
server module (Page 79)".
Note
Removing the motor starter
You will find out how to remove the motor starter in chapter "Replacing a motor starter
(Page 239)".
6.14.3 3DI/LC module
Introduction
The optional 3DI/LC module with three inputs and one further LC input can be connected to
the motor starter. The status of the inputs of the 3DI/LC module can be seen via the process
image input (PII) of the motor starter.
Note
The 3DI/LC module can be used for the motor starter and the fail-safe motor starter.
The input actions can be parameterized. For reasons of operational safety, the LC input is
permanently set to manual local mode. For example, by parameterizing the inputs DI1 - DI3
with motor CLOCKWISE or motor COUNTER-CLOCKWISE, you can control the motor in
manual local mode.
The figure below shows the 3DI/LC module.

Wiring
Assembly
WARNING
Risk of injury from automatic restart
When you mount the the 3DI/LC module, the motor starter can switch on autonomously if
an ON command (DI1 to DI3) is active. This can result in property damage or serious injury
caused by connected devices that are automatically started up.
Revoke the ON commands at DI1 to DI3 before mounting the 3DI/LC module.
Proceed as follows to mount a 3DI/LC module onto a motor starter:

1. Wire the 3DI/LC module according to the connection diagram.
Note
Connecting the 3DI/LC module
You will find out how to connect the 3DI/LC module in chapter "Connecting the 3DI/LC
module for the motor starter (Page 109)".
2. Slide the 3DI/LC module into the motor starter until the 3DI/LC module engages.

Wiring
The figure below shows a motor starter with a mounted 3DI/LC module.
Disassembly
Proceed as follows to remove a 3DI/LC module from a motor starter:
1. Push the release lever on the rear of the 3DI/LC module.
① Release lever
2. Remove the 3DI/LC module from the motor starter while pressing the release lever.

Wiring
6.15 Labeling ET 200SP
6.15.1 Factory markings
Introduction
For better orientation, the ET 200SP is equipped with various markings ex factory, which
help in the configuration and connection of the modules.
Factory markings
● Module labeling
● Color coding of module type
– Digital input modules: white
– Digital output modules: black
– Analog input modules: light blue
– Analog output modules: dark blue
– Technology module: turquoise
– Communication module: light gray
– Special module: mint green
● Module information
– Functional version of the module, e.g. "X/2/3/4" (= functional version 1)
– Firmware version of the module at delivery, e.g. "V1.0.0"
– Color code for usable color identification label, e.g. "CC0"
– Usable BaseUnit type, e.g. "BU: A0"

Wiring
● Color coding of the potential group

– Opening the potential group: Light-colored terminal box and light-colored mounting rail
release button
– Further conduction of the potential group: Dark-colored terminal box and dark-colored
mounting rail release button
● Color coding of the spring releases
– Process terminals: gray, white
– AUX terminals: turquoise
– Additional terminals: red, blue
– Terminals for self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2: red, blue
① Module labeling
② Color coding of the module classes
③ Module information
④ Color coding of the potential group
⑤ Color coding of the spring releases (by group)
Figure 6-15 Factory markings

Wiring
6.15.2 Optional markings
Introduction
In addition to the factory markings, there are also other options for labeling and/or marking
terminals, BaseUnits and I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Optional markings
Color identification labels

The color identification labels are module-specific labels for color coding the potentials of the
I/O modules. A color code (e.g. 01) is printed on each color identification label and I/O
module. The color code allows you to read which color identification label is required for the
terminals of the associated BaseUnit directly from the I/O module.
The following versions of color coded labels are available:
● Module-specific color combinations for the process terminals (see the device manuals
I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)).
The different colors have the following meaning: Gray = input or output signal, red =
potential +, blue = ground.
● For the AUX terminals in the colors yellow-green, blue or red
● For the add-on terminals in the colors blue-red
● For the potential distributor modules (see manual BaseUnits
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)):
– For PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P1/x-R: red
For PotDis-BaseUnit PotDis-BU-P2/x-B: blue
– For PotDis-TB-P1-R: red or gray
For PotDis-TB-P2-B: blue or gray
For PotDis-TB-BR-W: depending on application, yellow/green, blue, red or gray
For PotDis-TB-n.c.-G: gray
Reference identification labels

The reference identification labels (in accordance with EN 81346) can be inserted onto each
CPU/interface module, BusAdapter, BaseUnit, I/O module and PotDis-TerminalBlock. This
makes it possible to create a fixed assignment between the reference identification label of
the BaseUnit and the I/O module/PotDis-TerminalBlock.
With the standard plotter setting, the reference identification label is suitable for automatic
labeling with E-CAD systems.

Wiring
Labeling strips
The labeling strips can be inserted in the CPU/interface module, I/O module and BU cover
and allow identification of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The labeling strips can be
ordered on a roll for thermal transfer printers or as DIN A4 format sheets for laser printers.
① Reference identification labels

② Labeling strips
③ Color identification labels
Figure 6-16 Optional markings
6.15.3 Applying color identification labels
Requirements
The BaseUnits must not be wired when you apply the color identification labels.
Required tools
3 mm screwdriver (only for removing the color identification labels)

Wiring
Applying color identification labels

Press color identification labels into the terminal box of the BaseUnit.
Note
To remove the color identification labels, you must first disconnect the wiring on the
BaseUnit and then carefully lever the color identification labels out of the holder using a
screwdriver.
① Module-specific color identification labels (15 mm) for the process terminals. You can find addi-
tional information in the I/O Module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) manual.
② Color identification labels (15 mm) for the 10 AUX terminals
③ Color identification label (15 mm) for the 10 add-on terminals
④ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 4 AUX terminals
⑤ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 2 AUX terminals
Figure 6-17 Applying color identification labels (example)

Wiring
NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor (PE), attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals.
If you stop using the AUX terminals as a protective conductor bar, remove the yellow-green
color identification labels and make sure that the system is still protected.
NOTICE
Supply of incorrect potential possible
Check that the color-coded labels/wiring is correct before commissioning the plant.
6.15.4 Applying labeling strips
Procedure
Watch video sequence: "Labeling"
Proceed as follows to install a labeling strip:
1. Label the strips.
2. Insert the labeling strip into the interface module or I/O module.

Wiring
6.15.5 Applying reference identification labels
Procedure
Watch video sequence: "Labeling"
Proceed as follows to install a reference identification label:
1. Break off the reference identification labels from the sheet.
2. Insert the reference identification labels into the opening on the CPU/interface module,
BusAdapter, BaseUnit, I/O module and PotDis-TerminalBlock. The insertion opening is
located on top of the BaseUnit or the I/O module/PotDis-TerminalBlock.
Note
Reference identification label
The printable side of the reference identification label must be facing forward.
① Reference identification labels

② Opening for label
Figure 6-18 Applying reference identification labels

Configuring 7
7.1 Configuring ET 200SP
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is configured and assigned parameters with STEP 7
(CPU/interface module, I/O modules, motor starter and server module) or using configuration
software of a third-party manufacturer (interface module, I/O modules, motor starter and
server module).
"Configuring" is understood to mean the arranging, setup and networking of devices and
modules within the device view or network view. STEP 7 graphically represents modules and
racks. Just like "real" module racks, the device view allows the insertion of a defined number
of modules.
When the modules are inserted, STEP 7 automatically assigns the addresses and a unique
hardware identifier (HW identifier). You can change the addresses later. The hardware
identifiers cannot be changed.
When the automation system is started, the CPU/interface module compares the configured
planned configuration with the system's actual configuration. You can make parameter
settings to control the response of the CPU/interface module to errors in the hardware
configuration.
"Parameterizing" the components used signifies setting their properties. During parameter
assignment, the hardware parameters are set and the settings for data exchange are made:
● Properties of the modules to which parameters can be assigned
● Settings for data exchange between components
STEP 7 compiles the hardware configuration (result of "configuring" and "assigning
parameters") and downloads it to the CPU/interface module. The CPU/interface module then
connects to the configured components and transfers their configuration and parameters.
Modules can be replaced very easily because STEP 7 transfers the configuration and
parameters when a new module is inserted.

Configuring
Requirements for configuration of the CPU
Table 7- 1 Requirement for installing the CPU
Configuration software Requirements Installation information

CPU 151xSP-1 PN: • PROFINET IO STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 Update 3 • PROFIBUS DP (optional): With
CPU 151xSP F-1 PN: the communication module CM
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 SP1 DP
CPU 151xSP-1PN (as of FW version V1.8),
CPU 151xSP F-1 PN (as of FW version V1.8):
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 SP1 Update 4
Requirements for configuration of the interface module
Table 7- 2 Requirement for installing the interface module
Configuration software Requirements Installation information

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of • PROFINET IO: As of Support Package HSP0024 STEP 7 online help
V11 SP2*
PROFINET IO: STEP 7 • PROFINET IO: GSD file GSDML-Vx.y-siemens-
V5.5 SP4 HF1 et200sp-"Date in format yyyymmdd".xml
or higher PROFINET DP: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
STEP 7 V5.5 SP2 or higher
19698639/130000)
Software of third-party Manufacturer documentation
• PROFIBUS DP: GSD file SI0xxxxx.gsx
manufacturer
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10805317/14280)
* The TIA Portal supports GSDML specification V2.25. The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is delivered with a GSD file
based on specification V2.3. The GSD file can be installed in the TIA Portal and used without restrictions.
Configuring a motor starter

You configure SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starters in exactly the same way as the I/O
modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The GSD files can be used with STEP 7
V5.5 SP4 and higher, and TIA Portal V13 SP1 and higher.

Configuring
Configuration of the ET 200SP

See the STEP 7 online help or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer.
Note
For I/O modules that are installed on a BaseUnit BU..D (light-colored BaseUnit), you always
have to set the parameter "Potential group" to "Enable new potential group". If you do not set
this parameter correctly, the CPU/interface module goes to STOP and generates a
parameter error.
Note
For PROFIBUS with configuration via GSD file
In the configuration software, you must set for the BU covers whether these are on a light-
colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.
Configuring F-modules with a GSD file

If you want to configure F-modules with a GSD file, you need S7-FCT in order to calculate
the F_iPar_CRC and assign the PROFIsafe addresses. Additional information can be found
on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763833).
You can find S7-FCT on the Internet

Configuring
7.2 Configuring the CPU
7.2.1 Reading out the configuration
Introduction
When a connection to a CPU present in the configuration exists, you use the "Hardware
detection" function to read out the configuration of this CPU, including centrally configured
modules, and apply it to your project. You do not need to manually configure the CPU and
the centrally present modules, as the physical configuration is read out automatically.
If you have already configured a CPU and the centrally present modules and you want to
load the current configuration and parameters in a new project, it is advisable to use the
"Upload device as new station" function. For additional information about this function, refer
to section Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration (Page 217).
Procedure for reading out an existing configuration

1. Create a new project and configure an "Unspecified CPU".
Figure 7-1 Unspecified CPU in the device view

Configuring
2. In the device view (or in the network view), select the "Hardware detection" command in
the "Online" menu.
Figure 7-2 Hardware detection in the Online menu
You can also double-click the CPU and click "Detect" in the message.
Figure 7-3 Hardware detection message in the device view
3. In the "Hardware detection for PLC_x" dialog box, click "Refresh". Then, select the CPU
and the PG/PC interface and click "Detect".
STEP 7 downloads the hardware configuration including the modules from the CPU to
your project.
Figure 7-4 Result of the hardware detection in the device view

Configuring
STEP 7 assigns a valid default parameter assignment for all modules. You can change the
parameter assignment subsequently.
Note
If you want to go online after the hardware detection, you have to first download the detected
configuration to the CPU; otherwise, an error may occur due to inconsistent configurations.
Properties of central modules

The properties of the CPUs have special significance for system behavior. You can set the
following for a CPU using STEP 7:
● Startup behavior
● Parameter assignment of the interface(s), for example, IP address, subnet mask
● Web server, e.g. activation, user administration, and languages
● OPC UA server
● Global Security Certificate Manager
● Cycle times, e.g. maximum cycle time
● System and clock memory
● Protection level for access protection with assigned password parameter
● Time and day settings (daylight saving/standard)
The properties that can be set and the corresponding value ranges are specified by STEP 7.
Fields that cannot be edited are grayed out.
Reference
Information about the individual settings can be found in the online help and in the manuals
of the relevant CPUs.

Configuring
7.2.2 Addressing
Introduction
In order to address the automation components or I/O modules, they have to have unique
addresses. The following section explains the various address areas.
I/O address
I/O addresses (input/output addresses) are required in the user program to read inputs and
set outputs.
STEP 7 automatically assigns input and output addresses when you connect the modules.
Each module uses a continuous area in the input and/or output addresses corresponding to
its volume of input and output data.
Figure 7-5 Example with input / output addresses from STEP 7
STEP 7 assigns the address areas of the modules by default to the process image partition 0
("Automatic updating"). This process image partition is updated in the main cycle of the CPU.
Device address (e.g. Ethernet address)

Device addresses are addresses of programmable modules with interfaces to a subnet (e.g.,
IP address or PROFIBUS address). They are required to address the various devices on a
subnet, for example, to download a user program.

Configuring
Hardware identifier
STEP 7 automatically assigns a hardware identifier to identify and address modules and
submodules. You use the hardware identifier in the case of diagnostic messages or
operations, for example, to identify a defective module or the module addressed.
Figure 7-6 Example of a hardware identifier from STEP 7
In the "System constants" tab, you will find all hardware identifiers and their symbolic names
(of the hardware identifier) for the selected module.
You can also find the hardware identifiers and names for all modules of a device in the
default tag table of the "System constants" tab.
Figure 7-7 Example of an excerpt from a default tag table in STEP 7

Configuring
7.2.3 Process images and process image partitions
7.2.3.1 Process image - overview
Process image of the inputs and outputs

The process image input and output is an image of the signal states. The CPU transfers the
values from the input and output modules to the process image input and output. At the start
of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the process image output as a signal state to the
output modules. Afterwards the CPU transfers the signal states of the input modules to the
process image input.
Advantages of the process image

The process image accesses a consistent image of the process signals during cyclic
program execution. If a signal state at an input module changes during program processing,
the signal state is retained in the process image. The CPU does not update the process
image until the next cycle.
You can only assign the addresses of a module to a single process image partition.
32 process image partitions

By means of process image partitions, the CPU synchronizes the updated inputs/outputs of
particular modules with defined user program sections.
The overall process image is subdivided into up to 32 process image partitions (PIP).
The CPU updates PIP 0 in each program cycle (automatic update) and assigns it to OB 1.
You can assign the process image partitions PIP 1 to PIP 31 to the other OBs during
configuration of the input/output modules in STEP 7.
After the OB has been started, the CPU updates the assigned process image partition for
inputs and reads in the process signals. At the end of the OB the CPU writes the outputs of
the assigned process image partition directly to the peripheral outputs without having to wait
for the completion of the cyclic program processing.

Configuring
7.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions

You can assign one process image partition to each organization block. In this case, the user
program automatically updates the process image partition. The exceptions are PIP 0 and
isochronous OBs.
Updating the process image partition

The process image partition is divided into two parts:
● Process image partition of the inputs (PIPI)
● Process image partition of the outputs (PIPQ)
The CPU always updates/reads the process image partition of the inputs (PIPI) before
processing of the associated OB. The CPU outputs the process image of the outputs (PIPQ)
at the end of the OB.
The figure below illustrates the updating of the process image partitions.
Figure 7-8 Updating process image partitions
7.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program
Requirements
Alternatively, you can also use the following instructions for the process image update:
● "UPDAT_PI" instruction
● "UPDAT_PO" instruction
You will find the instructions in STEP 7 in the "Instructions" task card under "Extended
instructions". The instructions can be called from any point in the program.
Requirements for updating process image partitions with the "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO"
instructions:
● The process image partitions must not be assigned to any OB. This means the process
image partitions are not automatically updated.
Note
Update of PPI 0
PIP 0 (automatic update) cannot be updated with the "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO"
instructions.

Configuring
UPDAT_PI: updates the process image partition of the inputs

With this instruction you read the signal states from the input modules into the process
image partition of the inputs (PIPI).
UPDAT_PO: updates the process image partition of the outputs

With this instruction you transfer the process image partition of the outputs to the output
modules.
Synchronous cycle interrupt OB

In the synchronous cycle interrupt OBs, you use the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" operations
to update the process image partitions of the operations. For additional information on the
synchronous cycle interrupt OBs, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help.
Direct I/O access to the inputs and outputs of the module

As an alternative to access via the process image, you can directly access the I/O (write and
read access) if this is necessary for program-related reasons. Direct (write) access to I/O
also writes to the process image. This prevents a subsequent output of the process image
from again overwriting the value written by direct access.
Reference
Additional information on process image partitions is available in the function manual, Cycle
and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).

Configuring
7.3 Configuring the interface module
7.3 Configuring the interface module
Configuring
Read the STEP 7 online help and/or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer when configuring the interface module.
The F-destination address is saved permanently on the coding element of the ET 200SP fail-
safe modules. Fail-safe motor starters do not need an F-destination address or a coding
element.
Note
The supply voltage L+ must be applied to the F-module when the F-destination address is
assigned.
Note
Note the following in conjunction with configuration control:
Before you can use configuration control together with F-modules, you must assign the
F-destination address to the F-modules at the designated slots. For this, each F-module
must be inserted in the slot configured for it. The actual configuration can then differ from the
specified configuration.
For additional information on assigning the F-destination address, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) Programming and
Operating Manual and to the online help for the S7 Configuration Pack.

Basics of program execution 8
8.1 Events and OBs
Start events
The table below gives an overview of the possible event sources for start events and their
OBs.
Table 8- 1 Start events
Types of event sources Possible priorities (default Possible OB num- Default system Number of OBs
priority) bers response 1)
Starting 2) 1 100, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Cyclic program 2) 1 1, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Time-of-day interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (2) 10 to 17, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Time-delay interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (3) 20 to 23, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Cyclic interrupt 2) 2 to 24 (8 to 17, frequency 30 to 38, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
dependent)
Hardware interrupt 2) 2 to 26 (18) 40 to 47, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 50
Status interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 55 Ignore 0 or 1
Update interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 56 Ignore 0 or 1
Manufacturer-specific or 2 to 24 (4) 57 Ignore 0 or 1
profile-specific interrupt
Synchronous cycle interrupt 16 to 26 (21) 61 to 64, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 2
Time error 3) 22 80 Ignore 0 or 1
Cycle monitoring time ex- STOP
ceeded once
Diagnostics interrupt 2 to 26 (5) 82 Ignore 0 or 1
Pull/plug interrupt for mod- 2 to 26 (6) 83 Ignore 0 or 1
ules
Rack error 2 to 26 (6) 86 Ignore 0 or 1
MC-servo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 91 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-PreServo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 67 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-PostServo 4) 17 to 26 (25) 95 Not applicable 0 or 1
MC-Interpolator 4) 16 to 26 (24) 92 Not applicable 0 or 1

Basics of program execution
8.1 Events and OBs
Types of event sources Possible priorities (default Possible OB num- Default system Number of OBs
priority) bers response 1)
Programming error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 121 STOP 0 or 1
global error handling)
I/O access error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 122 Ignore 0 or 1
global error handling)
1) If you have not configured the OB.
2) In the case of these event sources, besides the permanently assigned OB numbers (see column: Possible OB numbers)
in STEP 7 you can assign OB numbers from the range ≥ 123.
3) If the maximum cycle time has been exceeded twice within one cycle, the CPU always assumes the STOP state, re-
gardless of whether you have configured OB 80.
4) You will find more information on these event sources and the starting behavior in the S7-1500 Motion Control function
manual.
Response to triggers
The occurrence of a start event results in the following reaction:
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have assigned an OB, this event
triggers the execution of the assigned OB. The event enters the queue according to its
priority.
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have not assigned an OB, the CPU
executes the default system reaction.
Note
Some event sources, such as startup, pull/plug, exist even if you do not configure them.
Assignment between event source and OBs

The type of OB determines where you make the assignment between OB and event source:
● With hardware interrupts and isochronous mode interrupts, the assignment is made
during the configuration of the hardware or when the OB is created.
● In the case of the MC-Servo, MC-PreServo, MC-PostServo and MC-Interpolator, STEP 7
automatically assigns the OBs 91/92 as soon as you add a technology object.
● For all other types of OB, the assignment is made when the OB is created, where
applicable after you have configured the event source.
For hardware interrupts, you can change an assignment which has already been made
during runtime with the instructions ATTACH and DETACH. In this case, only the actually
effective assignment changes, and not the configured assignment. The configured
assignment takes effect after loading, and at startup.
The CPU ignores hardware interrupts to which you did not assign an OB in your
configuration or which occur after the DETACH instruction. The CPU does not check
whether an OB is assigned to this event when an event arrives, but only prior to the actual
processing of the hardware interrupt.

8.2 Asynchronous instructions
OB priority and runtime behavior

If you have assigned an OB to the event, the OB has the priority of the event. The CPU
supports the priority classes 1 (lowest priority) to 26 (highest priority). The following items are
essential to the processing of an event:
● Calling and processing of the assigned OB
● The update of the process image partition of the assigned OB
The user program processes the OBs exclusively on a priority basis. This means the
program processes the OB with the highest priority first when multiple OB requests occur at
the same time. If an event occurs that has a higher priority than the currently active OB, this
OB is interrupted. The user program processes events of the same priority in order of
occurrence.
Note
Communication
Communication (e.g. test functions with the PG) always works permanently with the priority
15. So as not to unnecessarily prolong program runtime in the case of time-critical
applications, these OBs should not be interrupted by communication. Assign a priority >15
for these OBs.
Reference
You can find more information on organization blocks in the STEP 7 online help.
Introduction
In program processing, a differentiation is made between synchronous and asynchronous
instructions.
The "synchronous" and "asynchronous" properties relate to the temporal relationship
between the call and execution of the instruction.
The following applies to synchronous instructions: When the call of a synchronous instruction
is ended, the execution is also ended.
This is different in the case of asynchronous instructions: When the call of an asynchronous
instruction is ended, the execution of the asynchronous instruction is not necessarily ended
yet. This means the execution of an asynchronous instruction can extend over multiple calls.
The CPU processes asynchronous instructions in parallel with the cyclic user program.
Asynchronous instructions generate jobs in the CPU for their processing.
Asynchronous instructions are usually instructions for transferring data (data records for
modules, communication data, diagnostics data).

Difference between synchronous/asynchronous instructions

The figure below shows the difference between processing an asynchronous instruction and
processing a synchronous instruction. In this figure the asynchronous instruction is called
five times before the execution is completed, for example, a data record is completely
transferred.
With a synchronous instruction, the instruction is fully executed in each call.
① First call of the asynchronous instruction, start of processing

② Intermediate call of asynchronous instruction, continuation of processing
③ Last call of the asynchronous instruction, termination of processing
④ The synchronous instruction is completely processed at each call
Duration of the complete processing
Figure 8-1 Difference between synchronous and asynchronous instructions

Parallel processing of asynchronous instruction jobs

A CPU can process several asynchronous instruction jobs in parallel. The CPU processes
the jobs in parallel under the following conditions:
● Several asynchronous instruction jobs are called at the same time.
● The maximum number of concurrently running jobs for the instruction is not exceeded.
The figure below shows the parallel processing of two jobs of the instruction WRREC. The
two instructions are processed in parallel for a specific period here.
Figure 8-2 Parallel processing of the asynchronous instruction WRREC
Assignment of call to job of the instruction

To execute an instruction over multiple calls, the CPU must be able to uniquely assign a
subsequent call to a running job of the instruction.
To assign a call to a job, the CPU uses one of the following two mechanisms, depending on
the type of the instruction:
● Via the instance data block of the instruction (in the case of the "SFB" type)
● The input parameters of the instruction identifying the job. These input parameters must
match in each call during processing of the asynchronous instruction.
Example: A "Create_DB" instruction job is identified by the input parameters LOW_LIMIT,
UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB and SRCBLK.
The following table shows which instruction you can identify with which input parameters.
Instruction Job is identified by

DPSYC_FR LADDR, GROUP, MODE
D_ACT_DP LADDR
DPNRM_DG LADDR
WR_DPARM LADDR, RECNUM
WR_REC LADDR, RECNUM
RD_REC LADDR, RECNUM
CREATE_DB LOW_LIMIT, UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB,
SRCBLK
READ_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
WRIT_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
RD_DPARA LADDR, RECNUM
DP_TOPOL DP_ID

Status of an asynchronous instruction

An asynchronous instruction shows its status via the block parameters STATUS/RET_VAL
and BUSY. Many asynchronous instructions also use the block parameters DONE and
ERROR.
The figure below shows the two asynchronous instructions WRREC and CREATE_DB.
① The input parameter REQ starts the job to execute the asynchronous instruction.
② The output parameter DONE indicates that the job was completed without error.
③ The output parameter BUSY indicates whether the job is currently being processed. When
BUSY =1, a resource is assigned for the asynchronous instruction. If BUSY = 0, then the re-
source is free.
④ The output parameter ERROR indicates that an error has occurred.
⑤ The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL provides information on the status of the job execu-
tion. The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL receives the error information after the occur-
rence of an error.
Figure 8-3 Block parameters of asynchronous instructions using the instructions WRREC and
CREATE_DB as examples.

Summary
The table below provides you with an overview of the relationships described above. It
shows in particular the possible values of the output parameters if processing is not
completed after a call.
Note
Following every call, you must evaluate the relevant output parameters in your program.
Relationship between REQ, STATUS/RET_VAL, BUSY and DONE during a "running" job.
Seq. no. Type of call REQ STATUS/RET_VAL BUSY DONE ERROR

of the
call
1 First call 1 W#16#7001 1 0 0
Error code (for example, W#16#80C3 for lack 0 0 1
of resources)
2 to (n - 1) Intermediate Not rele- W#16#7002 1 0 0
call vant
n Last call Not rele- W#16#0000, if no errors have occurred. 0 1 0
vant Error code, if errors have occurred 0 0 1
Consumption of resources
Asynchronous instructions occupy resources in the CPU while they are being processed.
The resources are limited depending on the type of CPU and instruction; the CPU can only
process a maximum number of asynchronous instruction jobs simultaneously. The resources
are available again after a job has been successfully completed or processed with an error.
Example: For the RDREC instruction, a 1512SP-1 PN CPU can process up to 20 jobs in
parallel.
If the maximum number of concurrent jobs for an instruction is exceeded, the following
occurs:
● The instruction returns error code 80C3 (lack of resources) in the block parameter
STATUS.
● The CPU does not execute the job until a resource becomes free again.
Note
Lower-level asynchronous instructions
Several asynchronous instructions use one or more lower-level asynchronous instructions
for their processing. This dependence is shown in the tables below.
Please note that, if there are several lower-level instructions, typically only one lower-level
instruction is occupied at one time.

Extended instructions: maximum number of concurrently running jobs
Table 8- 2 Maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous extended instructions and lower-level instruc-
tions used
Extended instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Distributed I/O
RDREC 20
RD_REC 10
WRREC 20
WR_REC 10
D_ACT_DP 8
ReconfigIOSystem uses RDREC, WRREC, D_ACT_DP,
DPSYC_FR 2
DPNRM_DG 8
DP_TOPOL 1
ASI_CTRL uses RDREC, WRREC
PROFIenergy
PE_START_END uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_CMD uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_DS3_Write_ET200S uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_WOL uses RDREC, WRREC, TUSEND, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
Module parameter assignment
RD_DPAR 10
RD_DPARA 10
RD_DPARM 10
WR_DPARM 10
Diagnostics
Get_IM_Data 10
GetStationInfo 10
Recipes and data logging
RecipeExport 10
RecipeImport 10
DataLogCreate 10
DataLogOpen 10
DataLogWrite 10
DataLogClear 10
DataLogClose 10
DataLogDelete 10
DataLogNewFile 10
Data block functions
CREATE_DB 10
READ_DBL 10

Extended instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

WRIT_DBL 10
DELETE_DB 10
File handling
FileReadC 10
FileWriteC 10
Basic instructions: maximum number of concurrently running jobs
Table 8- 3 Lower-level instructions used for asynchronous basic instructions
Basic instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

Array DB
ReadFromArrayDBL uses READ_DBL (see Extended instructions)
WriteToArrayDBL uses READ_DBL, WRIT_DBL (see Extended instructions)
Communication: maximum number of concurrently running jobs
Table 8- 4 Maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous instructions and lower-level instructions used
for Open User Communication
Open User Communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

TSEND 64 88
TUSEND
TRCV 64 88
TURCV
TCON 64 88
TDISCON 64 88
T_RESET 64 88
T_DIAG 64 88
T_CONFIG 1
TSEND_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON
TRCV_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
TMAIL_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON

Table 8- 5 Lower-level instructions used for asynchronous instructions for MODBUS TCP
MODBUS TCP CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510P F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
MB_CLIENT uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
MB_SERVER uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
Table 8- 6 Maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous instructions for S7 communication. The
S7 communication instructions use a common pool of resources.
S7 communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

PUT 192 264
GET
USEND
URCV
BSEND
BRCV
Table 8- 7 Lower-level instructions used for asynchronous instructions for communications processors
Communications processors CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

PtP communication
Port_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Reset uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Get uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Set uses RDDEC, WRREC
Get_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
Set_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
USS communication
USS_Port_Scan uses RDDEC, WRREC
USS_Port_Scan_31 uses RDDEC, WRREC
MODBUS (RTU)
Modbus_Comm_Load uses RDDEC, WRREC
Modbus_Master uses RDDEC, WRREC
Modbus_Slave uses RDDEC, WRREC
ET 200S serial interface
S_USSI uses CREATE_DB
SIMATIC NET
FTP_CMD uses TSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON

Table 8- 8 Maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous instructions for OPC UA
OPC_UA CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

OPC_UA_Connect 10
OPC_UA_Disconnect 10
OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList 10
OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList 10
OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList 10
OPC_UA_TranslatePathList 10
OPC_UA_ReadList 10
OPC_UA_WriteList 10
OPC_UA_MethodGetHandleList 10
OPC_UA_MethodReleaseHandleLi 10
st
OPC_UA_MethodCall 10
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre 10
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost 10
OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus 10

Technology: maximum number of concurrently running jobs
Table 8- 9 Maximum number of concurrently running jobs for asynchronous instructions for technology. The instructions
for technology use a common pool of resources.
Technology CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Motion Control
MC_Power 300
MC_Reset
MC_Home
MC_Halt
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveJog
MC_GearIn
MC_MoveSuperimposed
MC_MeasuringInput
MC_MeasuringInputCyclic
MC_AbortMeasuringInput
MC_OutputCam
MC_CamTrack
MC_TorqueLimiting
You can find additional information on block parameter assignment in the STEP 7 online
help.

Protection 9
9.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU
Introduction
This chapter describes the following functions for protecting the ET 200SP against
unauthorized access:
● Access protection
● Know-how protection
● Copy protection
Further measures for protecting the CPU

The following measures additionally increase the protection against unauthorized access to
functions and data of the CPU from external sources and via the network:
● Deactivation of the Web server
● Deactivation of the OPC UA server (you will find further information on the security
mechanisms for OPC UA servers in the Communication
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) function manual)
● Deactivation of time synchronization via an NTP server
● Deactivation of PUT/GET communication
When using the Web server, you protect your ET 200SP distributed I/O system against
unauthorized access
● By setting password-protected access rights for certain users in user management.
● By using the default "Allow access via HTTPS only" option.
This option allows access to the Web server with the secure Hypertext transfer protocol
HTTPS only.

Protection
9.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU
Introduction
The CPU offers four access levels to limit access to specific functions.
By setting up the access levels and the passwords for a CPU, you limit the functions and
memory areas that are accessible without entering a password. You specify the individual
access levels as well as the entry of their associated passwords in the object properties of
the CPU.
Rules for passwords

Ensure that passwords are sufficiently secure. Passwords must not follow a machine-
recognizable pattern. Follow the rules below:
● Assign a password that is at least 8 characters long.
● Use different cases and characters: uppercase/lowercase, numbers and special
characters.
Access levels of the CPU
Table 9- 1 Access levels and access restrictions
Access levels Access restrictions

Full access (no Any user can read and change the hardware configuration and the blocks.
protection)
Read access With this access level, read-only access to the hardware configuration and the
blocks is possible without entering a password, which means you can download
the hardware configuration and blocks to the programming device. In addition, HMI
access and access to diagnostics data is possible.
Without entering the password, you cannot load any blocks or hardware configura-
tion into the CPU. Additionally, the following are not possible without the pass-
word:
• Writing test functions
• Firmware update (online)

Protection
Access levels Access restrictions

HMI access With this access level only HMI access and access to diagnostics data are possi-
ble without entering the password.
Without entering the password, you can neither load blocks nor the hardware
configuration into the CPU, nor load blocks and hardware configuration from the
CPU into the programming device. Additionally, the following are not possible
without the password:
• Writing test functions
• Changing the mode (RUN/STOP)
• Firmware update (online)
• Display of the online/offline comparison status
No access When the CPU has complete protection, no read or write access to the hardware
(complete pro- configuration and the blocks is possible (without access authorization in the form
tection) of a password). HMI access is also not possible. The server function for PUT/GET
communication is disabled in this access level (cannot be changed).
Authentication with the password will again provide you full access to the CPU.
An enumeration of which functions are available in the different protection levels is available
in the "Setting options for the protection" entry in the STEP 7 online help.
Properties of the access levels

Each access level allows unrestricted access to certain functions without entering a
password, for example, identification using the "Accessible devices" function.
The CPU's default setting is "No restriction" and "No password protection". In order to protect
access to a CPU, you need to edit the properties of the CPU and set up a password. In the
default access level "Full access (no protection)" every user can read and change the
hardware configuration and the blocks. A password is not set and is also not required for
online access.
Communication between the CPUs (via the communication functions in the blocks) is not
restricted by the access level of the CPU, unless PUT/GET communication is deactivated in
the "No access" (complete protection) access level.
Entry of the right password allows access to all the functions that are allowed in the
corresponding level.
Note
Configuring an access level does not replace know-how protection
Configuring access levels offers a high degree of protection against unauthorized changes to
the CPU by restricting the rights to download the hardware and software configuration to the
CPU. However, blocks on the SIMATIC memory card are not write- or read-protected. Use
know-how protection to protect the code of blocks on the SIMATIC memory card.

Protection
Behavior of functions with different access levels

The STEP 7 online help includes a table which lists the online functions that are available in
the different access levels.
Selecting the access levels

To configure the access levels of a CPU, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the CPU in the Inspector window.
2. Open the "Protection" entry in the area navigation.
A table with the possible access levels is available in the Inspector window.
Figure 9-1 Possible access levels
3. Activate the desired protection level in the first column of the table. The green check
marks in the columns to the right of the access level show you which operations are still
available without entering the password. In the example (see above), read access and
HMI access are still possible without a password.
4. In the "Enter password" column, specify a password for the access level "Full access" in
the first row. In the "Confirm password" column, enter the selected password again to
guard against incorrect entries.
5. Assign additional passwords as required for other access levels.
6. Download the hardware configuration for the access level to take effect.
The CPU logs the following actions with an entry in the diagnostic buffer:
● Input of the correct or incorrect password, as the case may be
● Changes in the configuration of access levels

Protection
9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection
Behavior of a password-protected CPU during operation

The CPU protection takes effect after you have downloaded the settings to the CPU.
Before an online function is executed, the CPU checks the necessary permission and, if
necessary, prompts the user to enter a password. You can only execute password-protected
functions from one programming device/PC at any time. Another programming device/PC
cannot log on.
Access authorization to the protected data is in effect for the duration of the online
connection or until you rescind the access authorization manually with "Online > Delete
access rights".
Access levels for F-CPUs

For the fail-safe CPUs, there is an additional access level in addition to the four described
access levels. For additional information on this access level, refer to the description of the
fail-safe system SIMATIC Safety Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety -
Configuring and Programming
9.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection
Access protection via user program

You can also restrict access to a password-protected CPU in STEP 7 via the ENDIS_PW
operation. You can find a description of this block in the online help under the keyword
"ENDIS_PW: Limit and enable password legitimation".

Protection
9.4 Know-how protection
Application
You can use know-how protection to protect one or more OB, FB or FC blocks as well as
global data blocks in your program from unauthorized access. Enter a password to restrict
access to a block. The password offers high-level protection against unauthorized reading or
manipulation of the block.
Password provider
As an alternative to manual entry of password, you can connect a password provider to
STEP 7. When using a password provider, you select a password from a list of available
passwords. When a protected block is opened, STEP 7 connects to the password provider
and retrieves the corresponding password.
To connect a password provider you have to install and activate it. A settings file in which
you define the use of a password provider is also required.
A password provider offers the following advantages:
● The password provider defines and manages the passwords. When know-how protected
blocks are opened, you work with symbolic names for passwords. A password is marked,
for example, with the symbolic name "Machine_1" n the password provider. The actual
password behind "Machine1" remains hidden from you.
A password provider therefore offers you optimum block protection as the users do not
know the password themselves.
● STEP 7 automatically opens know-how protected blocks without the direct entry of a
password. This saves you time.
You will find more information on connecting a password provider in the STEP 7 online help.
Readable data
If a block is know-how protected, only the following data is readable without the correct
password:
● Block title, comments and block properties
● Block parameters (INPUT, OUTPUT, IN, OUT, RETURN)
● Call structure of the program
● Global tags without information on the point of use
Further actions
Further actions that can be carried out with a know-how protected block:
● Copying and deleting
● Calling in a program
● Online/offline comparison
● Load

Protection
Global data blocks and array data blocks

You protect global data blocks (global DBs) from unauthorized access with know-how
protection. If you do not have the valid password, you can read the global data block but not
change it.
Know-how protection is not available for array data blocks (array DBs).
Setting up block know-how protection

To set up block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the block in question.
2. Select the "Protection" option under "General".
Figure 9-2 Setting up block know-how protection (1)
3. Click the "Protection" button to display the "Know-how protection" dialog.
4. Click the "Define" button to open the "Define Password" dialog.
5. Enter the new password in the "New password" box. Enter the same password in the
"Confirm password" box.

Protection
6. Click "OK" to confirm your entry.

7. Close the "Know-how protection" dialog by clicking "OK".
Result: The selected blocks are now know-how protected. Know-how protected blocks are
marked with a lock in the project tree. The password entered applies to all blocks selected.
Note
Password provider
Alternatively, you can set up know-how protection for blocks with a password provider.
Opening know-how protected blocks

To open a know-how protected block, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the block to open the "Access protection" dialog.
2. Enter the password for the know-how protected block.
Result: The know-how-protected block is open.
Once you have opened the block, you can edit the program code and the block interface of
the block for as long as the block or STEP 7 is open. You must enter the password again the
next time you open the block. If you close the "Access protection" dialog with "Cancel", you
will be able to open the block but you cannot display the block code or edit the block.
If you copy the block or add it to a library, for example, this does not cancel the know-how
protection of the block. The copies will also be know-how-protected.
Removing block know-how protection

To remove block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Select the block from which you want to remove know-how protection. The protected
block must not be open in the program editor.
2. In the "Edit" menu, select the "Know-how protection" command to open the "Know-how
protection" dialog.
3. Clear the "Hide code (Know-how protection)" check box.
Figure 9-5 Removing block know-how protection (1)

Protection
4. Enter the password.
Figure 9-6 Removing block know-how protection (2)

Result: Know-how protection is removed from the selected block.
See also
Copy protection (Page 164)

Protection
9.5 Copy protection
9.5 Copy protection
Application
The copy protection allows you to protect your program against unauthorized duplication.
With copy protection you associate the blocks with a specific SIMATIC memory card or CPU.
Through the linking of the serial number of a SIMATIC memory card or of a CPU the use of
this program or of this block is only possible in conjunction with a specific SIMATIC memory
card or CPU.
Copy and know-how protection

Recommendation: to prevent unauthorized reset of copy protection, additionally apply
know-how protection to a copy-protected block. To do this, first set up copy protection and
then apply know-how protection for the block. You can find further information on setting up
know-how protection in section Know-how protection (Page 160)
Setting up copy protection

To set up copy protection, follow these steps:
Figure 9-7 Setting up copy protection (1)
3. In the "Copy protection" area, select either the "Bind to serial number of the CPU" entry or
the "Bind to serial number of the memory card" entry from the drop-down list.
Figure 9-8 Setting up copy protection (2)

Protection
9.5 Copy protection
4. Activate the option "Serial number is inserted when downloading to a device or a memory
card" if the serial number is to be inserted automatically during the uploading process
(dynamic binding). Assign a password using the "Define password" button to link the use
of a block additionally to the input of a password.
Activate the option "Enter serial number" if you want to manually bind the serial number of
the CPU or the SIMATIC memory card to a block (static binding).
5. You can now set up the know-how protection for the block in the "Know-how protection"
area.
Note
If you download a copy-protected block to a device that does not match the specified
serial number, the entire download operation will be rejected. This means that blocks
without copy protection will also not be downloaded.
Removing copy protection

To remove copy protection, follow these steps:
1. Remove any existing know-how protection.
4. In the "Copy protection" area, select the "No binding" entry from the drop-down list.
Figure 9-9 Removing copy protection

Configuration control (option handling) 10
Introduction
Configuration control (option handling) is used to operate various standard machine
configuration levels in one project without changing the configuration or the user program.
Operating principle of configuration control

You can use configuration control to operate different standard machine configurations with
a single configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● A station master is configured in a project (maximum configuration). The station master
comprises all modules needed for all possible plant parts of a modular standard machine.
● The project's user program provides for several station options for various standard
machine configuration levels as well as selection of a station option. A station option
uses, for example, only some of the configured modules of the station master and these
modules are inserted in the slots in a different order.
● The standard machine manufacturer selects a station option for a configuration of the
standard machine. To do this, the project need not be modified, and it is not necessary to
load a modified configuration.
You use a control data record you have programmed to notify the CPU/interface module as
to which modules are missing or located on different slots in a station option as compared to
the station master. The configuration control does not have an impact on the parameter
assignment of the modules.
Configuration control allows you to flexibly vary the centralized/distributed configuration. This
is only possible if the station option can be derived from the station master.

Configuration control (option handling)
The following figure shows three configurations of a standard machine with the
corresponding station options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Figure 10-1 Various configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station
options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Advantages
● Simple project management and commissioning by using a single STEP 7 project for all
station options.
● Simple handling for maintenance, versioning and upgrade:
● Hardware savings: Only those I/O modules are installed that are required for the
machine's current station option.
● Savings potential in the creation, commissioning and the documentation for standard
machines.
● Simple station expansion by using pre-wired empty slots. To expand, you simply
exchange the BU cover for the new model. You can find further information on this in
section Examples of configuration control (Page 187).
Procedure
To set up the configuration control, follow these steps:
Step Procedure See...

1 Enable configuration control in STEP 7 Section Configuring (Page 169)
2 Create control data record Section Creating the control data record (Page 171)
3 Transfer control data record Section Transferring the control data record in the startup
program of the CPU (Page 182)
Library for configuration control

A library for configuration control is available on the Internet for download
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/#document/29430270?lc=en-WW). The library
contains data types with the structure of the control data records for the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system. You can implement your flexible automation solution inexpensively
with the help of these data types.
Note
Configuration control in the case of motor starters
"Manual local" mode is possible in the case of motor starters when configuration control is
active. The motor starter works with the last valid parameters. Do not change the
parameterization while "manual local" mode is active.

10.1 Configuring
10.1 Configuring
Requirements
Configuration control is supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with both an
ET 200SP CPU and with interface modules via PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP.
Centrally for ET 200SP CPU:
● STEP 7 Professional V13 Update 3 or higher
● CPU 1510SP-1 PN/CPU 1512SP-1 PN
● Firmware version V1.6 or higher
● All modules of the CPU must be able to start up even with different configurations.
– The startup parameter "Comparison preset to actual configuration" of the CPU is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch" (default setting) and the module parameter
"Comparison preset to actual module" of the module is set to "From CPU" (default
setting).
or
– The module parameter "Comparison preset to actual module" for the module is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch".
Distributed via PROFINET IO:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 PN BA/ST/HF/HS
● You have assigned the interface module to an IO controller.
Distributed via PROFIBUS DP:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 DP HF
● You have assigned the interface module to a DP master.
● The startup parameter is set to "Operate if preset configuration does not match actual
configuration"

10.1 Configuring
Required steps
Enable the "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter when
configuring the CPU/interface module in STEP 7 (TIA Portal).
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Configuration control" area for an ET 200SP CPU.
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Module parameter" area under "General" for an IM 155-6 PN interface module.
Figure 10-2 Enabling configuration control using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example

10.2 Creating the control data record
10.2.1 Introduction
Required steps
To create a control data record for the configuration control, follow these steps:
1. Create a PLC data type that contains the structure of the control data record.
The following figure shows a PLC data type "CTR_REC", which contains the structure of
the control data record for an ET 200SP interface module.
Figure 10-3 Creating control data record 196 using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example
2. Create a global data block.

3. In the data block, create an array that is based on the created PLC data type.
4. In the control data records, enter the slot assignments in the "Start value" column.
The figure below shows the global data block "ConfDB". The data block "ConfDB"
contains an array [0..5] of the PLC_DataType "CTR_REC".
Figure 10-4 Data block for configuration control
Rules
Observe the following rules:
● Slot entries in the control data record outside the station master are ignored by the
CPU/interface module.
● The control data record must contain the entries up to the last slot of the station option.
● Multiple configured slots may not be assigned to the same actual slot. In other words,
each station option slot may be present only once in the control data record.

Using communication modules

When configuration control (option handling) is used, you may insert the following
communication modules:
● CM DP
● CP 1542SP-1
● CP 1543SP-1
● CP 1542SP-1 IRC
● BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
For the communication modules listed above, special slot rules apply for use with the
ET 200SP CPUs:
If you insert the communication modules as mentioned above (e.g. CM DP) in the central
configuration, then these modules cannot be influenced by the configuration control. You
must therefore leave these modules in the slots preassigned in the station master and enter
the slot numbers from the station master in the control data record ("Station option slot =
Station master slot").
In a station option, all slots up to the module furthest from the CPU (see list above) must be
present in the control data record.
The CM AS-i Master and F-CM AS-i Safety communication modules can be used for
configuration control without the above-mentioned restrictions relating to slot numbers.
10.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU
Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an ET 200SP CPU:
Table 10- 1 Slot assignment
Modules Possible slots Comment

CPU 1 Slot 1 is always the CPU
Station extension 2 In a mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
BA-Send always on slot 2.
I/O modules 2 - 65 Downstream of CPU
Server module 2 - 66 The server module completes the configuration of the
ET 200SP station after the CPU/the last I/O module.
ET 200AL I/O modules 67 - 82 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules

Control data record

For the configuration control of an ET 200SP CPU, you define a control data record 196
V2.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum slot of the configuration corresponds
to the slot of the server module or last slot of an ET 200AL I/O module (in a mixed
ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration).
The table below shows the structure of a control data record with explanations of the
individual elements.
Table 10- 2 Configuration control: Structure of control data record 196
Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + (maximum slot × 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment 1 in the Control element
station option Contains the information on which mod-
(always 1, because the ule is inserted in which slot.
CPU is always in slot 1) The value that you need to enter in the
5 Additional function for slot 1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the lowing rule:
station option • If the module exists in the station
7 Additional function for slot 2 option, enter the slot number of the
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the module.
station option • If the module exists as empty slot
9 Additional function for slot 3 (with BU cover), enter the slot number
of the module + 128. (Example: mod-
: : :
ule as empty slot on slot 3: Enter 131
4 + ((server module Server module slot Server module slot as- in the control element)
slot - 1) × 2) signment in the station
option* • If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.
4 + ((server module Additional function for server module slot
slot - 1) × 2) + 1 Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.


: : : :
136 First slot of ET 200AL (slot Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
67) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
137 Reserved module is inserted in which slot.
: : : The value that you need to enter in the
corresponding byte depends on the fol-
166 Last slot of ET 200AL (slot Slot assignment in the
lowing rule:
82) station option
167 Reserved • If the module exists in the station
option, enter the slot number of the
module.
• If the module does not exist in the
* The server module must be present in the station option and must not be marked as empty slot (BU cover).
10.2.3 Control data record for an interface module
Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an
ET 200SP interface module:

Interface module 0 The interface module (slot 0) is not an element of the configu-
ration control, but instead controls this.
Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 30 for IM 155-6 PN HS
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 31 for IM 155-6 PN HS ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.
1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF

Simplified control data record (V1)

For the configuration control of interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system,
you define a control data record 196 V1.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum
slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server module or ET 200AL I/O
module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).
Table 10- 4 Structure of the simplified control data record V1.0

0 Block length 4 + maximum slot Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 1
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the ET 200SP module is inserted in which
station option slot.
: : : The value that you need to enter in the
4 + (slot server Server module slot Server module slot as-
lowing rule:
module - 1) signment in the station
option* • If the module exists in the station
module.
• If the module exists as empty slot
(with BU cover), enter the slot number
in the control element)
: : : :
4 + (first slot ET First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
200AL - 1) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
: : : module is inserted in which slot.
4 + (last slot ET Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the The value that you need to enter in the
200AL - 1) station option corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
• If the module exists in the station
module.

Control data record (V2)

If you change the potential groups in the station option compared to the station master,
define a control data record 196 V2.0 for the ET 200SP interface module which contains a
slot assignment. The maximum slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server
module or ET 200AL I/O module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).
Table 10- 5 Structure of control data record 196 V2.0

0 Block length 4 + (maximum slot x 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Additional function for slot 1 ET 200SP module is inserted in which
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the slot.
station option The value that you need to enter in the
7 Additional function for slot 2
lowing rule:
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the
station option • If the module exists in the station
9 Additional function for slot 3
module.
: : :
• If the module exists as empty slot
4 + ((server module Server module slot Server module slot as- (with BU cover), enter the slot number
slot - 1) × 2) signment in the station
option*
4 + ((server module Additional function for server module slot in the control element)
slot - 1) × 2) + 1
Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.


: : : :
4 + ((first slot First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
4 + ((first slot Reserved module is inserted in which slot.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) The value that you need to enter in the
+1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
: : : lowing rule:
4 + ((last slot Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the • If the module exists in the station
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option option, enter the slot number of the
4 + ((last slot Reserved module.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) • If the module does not exist in the
+1 station option, enter 0.
Note
If a BU cover or no I/O module is plugged on a light-colored BaseUnit, you should enter 1 in
the additional function for the slot.
The function "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" requires proper assignment of
the slots to a shared supply voltage L+ (potential group). All light-colored BaseUnits must be
known to the interface module. By entering 1 in the additional function, you make a light-
colored BaseUnit known to the interface module, even if an I/O module is not inserted.
Combination of configuration control and shared device (for PROFINET)

The configuration control function in a shared device is therefore only for the I/O modules of
the IO controller to which the interface module has subscribed. I/O modules that are
assigned to no controller or a different controller behave like a station without activated
configuration control.
You cannot make any change to the slot assignment for modules that are assigned to
another IO controller or are not assigned to an IO controller (shared device on module level).
The CPU assumes a one-to-one assignment for the modules.
If additional IO controllers subscribe to a module intended for configuration control (shared
device on submodule level), only one-to-one assignment is permitted for this module. It is not
possible to deselect such a module using the control data record (code 0 for this slot in the
control data record). This means the combination of "Configuration control" and "Shared
device on submodule level" is only possible to a limited extent.
Please note that all modules affected by the configuration control including all assigned
submodules are reset when you change the module assignment. Submodules that are
assigned to a second IO controller are affected as well.

10.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules
Operating principle
The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and
gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record. The feedback
data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2.0. The feedback data record exists
only with configured configuration control.
Slot assignment
The feedback data record refers to the configured station configuration and always includes
the maximum configuration limits. The maximum configuration limits comprise 13/49/81 slots
depending on the interface module in use. Partial reading of the feedback data record is
possible.
The following table shows the slot assignment of the modules:

Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 30 for IM 155-6 PN HS
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 31 for IM 155-6 PN HS ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.
1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF,
IM 155-6 PN/3 HF

Feedback data record
Table 10- 7 Feedback data record

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots x 2) Header
1 Block ID 197
2 Version 2
3 0
4 Slot 1 status 0/1 Status = 1:
5 Reserved 0 • Module from station master is
6 Slot 2 status 0/1 inserted in the station option
7 Reserved 0 • Slot is marked as not availa-
: : : ble in the control data record
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) Max. slot status 0/1 Status = 0:
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) + 1 Reserved 0 • Module pulled

• Incorrect module is inserted in
the station option*
* Not possible if the slot is marked as not available.
Note
The data in the feedback data record is always mapped for all modules. In a shared device
configuration, it is therefore irrelevant which IO controller the respective modules are
assigned to.
As long as no control data record has been sent, a one-to-one module assignment is
assumed for the compilation of data record 197 (station master → station option).

Error messages
In case of error, the RDREC instruction returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter while reading the feedback data record:
Table 10- 8 Error messages
Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 197 is not correct.
80B5H Configuration control not configured
80B8H Parameter error
The following events cause a parameter error:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 197)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit has been set
• The same slot in the station option has been assigned to more than one slot in
the station master
10.2.5 Data records and functions
Supported data records and functions

The table below shows a comparison of the supported data records and functions depending
on the CPU/interface module used.
CPU... Interface module (IM...)

Supported data rec- 1510SP-1 1512SP-1 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 PN 155-6 DP
ords and functions PN PN HS HF /3 HF ST BA HF
1510SP F 1512SP F
-1 PN -1 PN
Control data record ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(V2)
Simplified control data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --
record (V1)
Read back control data ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record *
Read feedback data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record
* You can read back the control data record with the RDREC instruction.

10.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU
Required steps
Transfer the created control data record 196 to the CPU/the interface module using the
instruction WRREC (Write data record) instruction.
Parameters of the instruction WRREC

Below, you will find explanations of individual parameters of the WRREC instruction which
you must supply with specific values in the configuration control context. You can find
additional information on the WRREC instruction in the STEP 7 online help.
ID Hardware identifier
• Use the HW identifier of the CPU for the configuration control for centrally ar-
ranged modules.
If you have selected the CPU in the network view or device view, the HW identifier
is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "Local~Configuration".
• Use the HW identifier of the interface module for the configuration control for dis-
tributed I/O.
If you have selected the interface module in the network view or device view, the
HW identifier is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "<Name_of_the_interface_module>~Head".
INDEX Data record number: 196 (decimal)
RECORD Control data record to be transferred.
See the section Creating the control data record (Page 171) for the structure of the
control data record.

Error messages
In case of error, the instruction WRREC returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter:
Table 10- 9 Error messages
Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 196 is not correct.
80B5H Configuration control parameters not assigned.
80E2H Data record was transferred in the wrong OB context. The data record must be trans-
ferred in the startup program.
80B8H Parameter error
A parameter error is caused by:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 196)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit was set
• A station master slot was assigned an invalid slot in the station option
• Multiple slots in the station master are assigned to the same slot in the station
option
• For shared device on submodule level: Violation of defined restrictions
Selection of the station option in the user program

In order for the CPU to know which station option you want to operate, you must set up a
possibility to select between the various control data records in the user program. You can
implement the selection, for example, via an Int tag which references an array element.
Note that the tag used to select the control data record must be stored in the retentive
memory area. If the tag is not retentive it will be initialized during the startup of the CPU and
thus be unavailable for selection of the station option.

Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the CPU
● If you have enabled configuration control, the CPU is not ready for operation without a
control data record. The CPU returns from startup to STOP if a valid control data record is
not transferred in the startup OB. The central I/O is not initialized in this case. The cause
for the STOP mode is entered in the diagnostics buffer.
Note
If an incorrect control data record is transferred to the CPU in the startup OB, the startup
of the CPU may be prevented.
In this case, perform a reset to factory settings of the CPU and then transfer a correct
control data record.
● The CPU processes the WRREC instruction for transfer of the control data record
asynchronously. For this reason, you must call WRREC in the startup OB repeatedly in a
loop until the output parameters "BUSY" or "DONE" indicate that the data record has
been transferred.
– Tip: To program the loop, use the SCL programming language with the REPEAT ...
UNTIL instruction.
REPEAT
"WRREC_DB"(REQ := "start_config_control",
ID := "Local~Configuration",
INDEX := 196,
LEN := "conf_LEN",
DONE => "conf_DONE",
BUSY => "conf_BUSY",
RECORD := "ConfDB".ConfigControl["ConfDB".Option],
//Selection of control data record
ERROR => "conf_ERROR",
STATUS => "conf_STATUS");
UNTIL NOT "conf_BUSY"
END_REPEAT;
– In the graphical programming languages, you implement the loop using instructions for
program control.

Example in FBD: Use the LABEL (jump label) and JMP (jump at RLO=1) instructions
to program a loop.
Figure 10-5 WRREC
● The control data record is stored retentively in the CPU. Note:

– The retentivity of the control data record is independent of the retentivity settings in the
STEP 7 memory area. This means that the memory area in which the control data
record is configured does not have to be configured as retentive for this purpose.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration, the original data record
196 is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The CPU will then
restart with the modified configuration.
– The control data record is saved retentively in the CPU, which means that it is not
necessary to write the control data record 196 again at a restart if the configuration is
unchanged. We recommend that a memory reset of the CPU be performed prior to
commissioning to delete any control data record that may be present.

10.4 Behavior during operation
Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the interface module
● If you have enabled configuration control, the ET 200SP station is not ready for operation
without a control data record. As long as no valid control data record has been
transferred, the I/O modules are considered as failed by the CPU and exhibit substitute
value behavior. The interface module continues to exchange data.
● The control data record is stored retentively in the interface module. Note:
– If there have been no changes to the configuration, you do not need to rewrite the
control data record 196 during restart.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration to the interface module, it
will result in a station failure in the distributed I/O system. The original data record 196
is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The station will then
restart with the modified configuration.
10.4 Behavior during operation
Effect of discrepancy between station master and station option

For the online display and for the display in the diagnostics buffer (module OK or module
faulty), the station master is always used and not the differing station option.
Example: A module supplies diagnostic information. This module is configured in slot 4 in the
station master, but is inserted in slot 3 in the station option (missing module; see example in
the next section). The online view (station master) shows a faulty module in slot 4. In the real
configuration, the module in slot 3 indicates an error via an LED display.
Response when modules are missing

If modules are entered as not present in the control data record, the automation system
behaves as follows:
● Modules designated as not present in the control data record do not supply diagnostics
and their status is always OK. The value status is OK.
● Direct write access to the outputs that are not present or write access to the process
image of the outputs that are not present: Remains without effect; no access error is
signaled.
● Direct read access to the inputs that are not present or read access to the process image
of the inputs that are not present: Value "0" is supplied; no access error is signaled.
● Write data record to module that is not present: Remains without effect; no error is
signaled.
● Read data record from module that is not present: An error is signaled because a valid
data record cannot be returned.

10.5 Examples of configuration control
Inserting modules on empty slots

If you replace a BU cover placed on an empty slot with an I/O module when configuration
control is enabled, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system behaves as follows:
● Interface module: When the BU cover is removed, a removal interrupt is signaled. When
the I/O module is inserted, an insertion alarm (wrong module) is signaled.
● CPU: A removal/insertion interrupt is not signaled when the BU cover is removed or when
the I/O module is inserted.

A station master consisting of an interface module, three I/O modules and the server module
is configured in STEP 7 in the following section.
Four station options are derived from the station master with the configuration control:
● Station option 1 with module that is not present
● Station option 2 with modified order of modules
● Station option 3 with empty slot
● Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

Station option 1 with module that is not present

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master is not present in the station option 1.
Slot 3 must be designated in the control data record accordingly with 0 (= not present). The
server module is located in slot 3 in the station option.
Figure 10-6 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 1 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Station option 2 with modified order of modules

The order of the modules at slots 2 and 3 is interchanged.
record in STEP 7

Station option 3 with empty slot

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master occupies an empty slot with
BU cover in the station option. Enter the value 130 in slot 3 in the control data record.
record in STEP 7

Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

A new potential group is opened at slot 3 of station option 4. Compared to the station master,
a dark-colored BaseUnit is replaced by a light-colored BaseUnit. Enter the value 1 as
additional function.
record in STEP 7

Commissioning 11
11.1 Overview
Introduction
This section includes information on the following topics:
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFIBUS DP
● Startup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with empty slots
● Removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card
● Operating modes of the CPU
● CPU memory reset
● Reassigning parameters during operation
● Identification and maintenance data
Commissioning requirements
Note
Performing tests
You must ensure the safety of your plant. You therefore need to run a complete functional
test and make the necessary safety checks before the final commissioning of a plant.
Also allow for any possible foreseeable errors in the tests. This avoids endangering persons
or equipment during operation.
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet

Commissioning
11.1 Overview
SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance
activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of
the TIA Portal.
General function overview:
● Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network.
● Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device
● Loading addresses (IP, subnet, gateway) into a device
● Loading the PROFINET name (station name) into a device name
● Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode
● Setting the time in a CPU to the current time of your programming device/PC
● Downloading a new program to a CPU or an HMI device
● Downloading from CPU, downloading to CPU or deleting recipe data from a CPU
● Downloading from CPU or deleting data log data from a CPU
● Backup/restore of data from/to a backup file for CPUs and HMI devices
● Downloading service data from a CPU
● Reading the diagnostics buffer of a CPU
● General reset of a CPU's memory
● Resetting devices to factory settings
● Downloading a firmware update to a device
● ...
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/98161300).

Commissioning
11.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO
Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.
11.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO controller, you require the
CPU 151xSP-1 PN.
Figure 11-1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller

Commissioning
Commissioning procedure
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system CPU as an IO controller for
PROFINET IO, we recommend the following procedure:
Table 11- 1 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller for PROFINET IO
Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP Section Installation (Page 63)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 86)
• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
• Sensors and actuators
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the IO Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
controller memory card on the CPU (Page 205)
4 Configuring the IO controller1 Section Configuring (Page 131)
5 Checking the protective measures -
6 Switching on supply voltages for the IO CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) manual
7 Switching on supply voltages for IO devices Documentation of the IO device
8 Downloading the configuration to the IO STEP 7 online help
controller
9 Switching IO controller to RUN mode CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/
10 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful: Mon-
itoring and modifying tags, testing with
program status, forcing, controlling the
outputs. See section Test and service
functions (Page 258)
1 The IO devices are configured with the IO controller.

Commissioning
11.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device
You need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device.
Figure 11-2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device

Commissioning
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device on the
Table 11- 2 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-device on the PROFINET IO

• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I- Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
device memory card on the CPU (Page 205)
4 Configuring the I-device Section Configuring (Page 131)
5 Checking the protective measures -
6 Switching on supply voltages for the IO Documentation of the IO controller
controller
7 Switching on supply voltages for I-device CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
and IO devices (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
and documentation of the IO devices
8 Download configuration to the I-device STEP 7 online help
9 Switching IO controller and I-device to RUN Documentation of the IO controller and
mode CPU 15xxSP-1 PN

Commissioning
11.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device, you need the IM 155-6 PNxx
interface module.
Figure 11-3 ET 200SP as an IO device
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device on the
Table 11- 3 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an IO device for PROFINET IO

• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
4 Configuring IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
5 Checking the protective -
measures
6 Switching on supply voltages Documentation of the IO controller
for the IO controller
7 Switching on supply voltages Interface module
for IO devices (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5
5683316/133300) Manual
8 Downloading the configura- STEP 7 online help
tion to the IO controller

Commissioning
11.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

9 Switching IO controller to Documentation of the IO controller
RUN mode
10 Checking LEDs Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5
5683316/133300) Manual
11 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful: Monitoring and
modifying tags, testing with program status, forcing,
controlling the outputs. Refer to section Test and ser-
vice functions (Page 258)
Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.
11.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master, you need the CPU 151xSP-
1 PN and the CM DP communication module.
Figure 11-4 ET 200SP as a DP master

Commissioning
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:
Table 11- 4 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master on the PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 63)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the DP Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
master (CPU) memory card on the CPU (Page 205)
4 Configuring DP master (including CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
PROFIBUS address) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) and CM
DP manual
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP master CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP slaves Documentation of the DP slave
7 Download configuration to the DP master STEP 7 online help
8 Switching DP master to RUN CPU 15xxSP-1 PN

Commissioning
11.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as I-slave, you need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN and
the CM DP communication module.
Figure 11-5 ET 200SP as I-slave

Commissioning
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-slave on the
PROFIBUS DP, we recommend the following procedure:
Table 11- 5 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-slave for PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 63)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
3 Configuring DP master (including Documentation of the DP master
PROFIBUS address)
4 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I- Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
slave (CPU) memory card on the CPU (Page 205)
5 Configuring I-slave (including PROFIBUS CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
address) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) and CM
DP manual
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP master Documentation of the DP master
7 Switching on supply voltages for I-slaves CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
8 Loading configuration in the DP master and STEP 7 online help
I-slaves
9 Switching DP master and I-slaves to RUN Documentation of the DP master and
CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
outputs. See the Test functions and fault
resolution
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) section

Commissioning
11.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave, you need the IM 155-6 DP HF.
Figure 11-6 ET 200SP as a DP slave
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:
Table 11- 6 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master for PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with IM 155-6 DP HF) Section Installation (Page 63)
2 Setting the PROFIBUS address on the Section Interface module
interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/55683316/133300)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
4 Configuring DP master (including Documentation of the DP master
PROFIBUS address)
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP master Documentation of the DP master
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP slaves Interface module
WW/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual
7 Download configuration to the DP master STEP 7 online help
8 Switching DP master to RUN Documentation of the DP master

Commissioning
11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots

9 Checking LEDs Interface module
WW/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual
outputs. Refer to section Test and ser-
vice functions (Page 258)
11.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots
Procedure
You can configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots.
To build the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots, follow these
steps:
1. Cover all empty slots with BU covers.
2. Finish the configuration with a server module.
Special consideration: A "Module missing in slot x" diagnostic message is generated by the
CPU/interface module for empty slots in which I/O modules are configured.

Commissioning
11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
11.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
Requirement
The CPU only supports pre-formatted SIMATIC memory cards. If necessary, delete all
previously stored data before using the SIMATIC memory card. You can find more
information on deleting the content of the SIMATIC memory card in the function manual
Structure and use of the CPU memory.
In order to work with the SIMATIC memory card, first ensure that the SIMATIC memory card
is not write-protected. If it is, move the slider out of the lock position.
Inserting the SIMATIC memory card

To insert a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the CPU is either switched off or in STOP mode.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card, as depicted on the CPU, into the slot for the SIMATIC
memory card.
Figure 11-7 Slot for the SIMATIC memory card
3. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with light pressure into the CPU, until the SIMATIC
memory card latches.
Removal of the SIMATIC memory card

To remove a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. Press the SIMATIC memory card into the CPU with light pressure. After audible
unlatching of the SIMATIC memory card, remove it.
Only remove the SIMATIC memory card in POWER OFF or STOP mode of the CPU. Ensure
that no writing functions (online functions with the programming device, e.g. loading/deleting
a block, test functions) are active in STOP mode or were active before POWER OFF.

Commissioning
11.6 Operating modes of the CPU
Reactions after removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card

Inserting and removing the SIMATIC memory card in STOP, STARTUP or RUN mode
triggers a re-evaluation of the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU hereby compares the
content of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data.
If the backed-up retentive data matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC
memory card, the retentive data is retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically
performs a memory reset (which means the retentive data is deleted) and then goes to
STOP.
The CPU evaluates the SIMATIC memory card, and this is indicated by the RUN/STOP LED
flashing.
Reference
You can find more information on the SIMATIC memory card in the function manual
Structure and use of the CPU memory
Introduction
Operating modes describe the status of the CPU. The following operating modes are
possible using the mode selector:
● STARTUP
● RUN
● STOP
In these operating modes, the CPU can communicate, for example, via the PROFINET
interface.
The status LEDs on the front of the CPU indicate the current operating mode.
11.6.1 STARTUP mode
Behavior
Before the CPU starts to execute the cyclic user program, a startup program is executed.
By suitably programming startup OBs, you can specify initialization tags for your cyclic
program in the startup program. You have the option of programming no, one or several
startup OBs.

Commissioning
Special features during startup

Note the following points regarding the STARTUP mode:
● All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output and bring the controlled process to a safe operational status.
● The process image is initialized.
● The process image is not updated.
In order to read the current state of inputs during STARTUP, you can access inputs via
direct I/O access.
To initialize outputs during STARTUP, values can be written via the process image or via
direct I/O access. The values are output to the outputs during the transition to RUN mode.
● The CPU always starts up in warm restart mode.
– The non-retentive bit memory, timers and counters are initialized.
– The non-retentive tags in data blocks are initialized.
● During startup, cycle time monitoring is not yet running
● The CPU processes the startup OBs in the order of the startup OB numbers. The CPU
processes all programmed startup OBs regardless of the selected startup mode. (Figure
"Setting the startup behavior").
● If a corresponding event occurs, the CPU can start the following OBs during startup:
– OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt
– OB 83: Pull/plug interrupt for modules
– OB 86: Rack error
– OB 121: Programming error (only for global error handling)
– OB 122: I/O access error (only for global error handling)
You can find a description of how to use global and local error handling in the STEP 7
online help.
The CPU does not start all other OBs until the transition to RUN mode.
Response when expected and actual configurations do not match

The configuration downloaded to the CPU represents the expected configuration. The actual
configuration is the actual configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. If the
expected configuration and actual configuration do not match, the setting of the "Comparison
preset to actual configuration" parameter determines the behavior of the CPU. You can find
additional information on hardware compatibility in the section Operating mode transitions
(Page 210).

Commissioning
Cancellation of startup
If errors occur during startup, the CPU cancels startup and returns to STOP mode.
The CPU does not perform the startup or interrupts the startup under the following
conditions:
● You have not inserted a SIMATIC memory card or have inserted an invalid one.
● You have not downloaded a hardware configuration to the CPU.
Configuring the startup behavior

You configure the behavior of the CPU in the Startup group in the CPU properties.
Setting the startup behavior

To set the startup behavior, follow these steps:
1. Select the CPU in the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor.
2. In the properties under "General" select the "Startup" area.
Figure 11-8 Setting the startup behavior

Commissioning
① Sets the startup type after POWER ON

② Defines the startup behavior when a module in a slot does not correspond to the config-
ured module. You can set this parameter centrally, on the CPU or for each module.
When you change the setting for a module, the setting made centrally for this module no
longer applies.
• Startup CPU only if compatible: In this setting a module on a configured slot has to be
compatible with the configured module. Compatible means that the module matches
in terms of the number of inputs and outputs and with respect to its electrical and
functional properties.
• Startup CPU even if mismatch: With this setting the CPU starts up regardless of the
type of module plugged in.
③ Specifies a maximum period (default: 60000 ms) in which the I/O must be ready for op-
eration. The CPU changes to RUN.
If the central and distributed I/O is not ready for operation within the configuration time,
the startup characteristics of the CPU depends on the setting of the "Comparison preset
to actual configuration" parameter.
Example for the "Comparison preset to actual configuration" parameter

"Startup CPU only if compatible":
The DI 16x24VDC ST input module with 16 digital inputs is a compatible replacement for a
DI 8x24VDC ST input module with 8 digital inputs. The pin assignment and all electrical and
functional properties are identical.
"Startup CPU even if mismatch":
Instead of a configured digital input module, you insert an analog output module or no
module is present in this slot and thus in all subsequent slots. Although the configured inputs
cannot be accessed, the CPU starts up.
Note that the user program cannot function correctly in this case and take the appropriate
measures.
11.6.2 STOP mode
Behavior
The CPU does not execute the user program in STOP mode.
All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output keeping the controlled process in a safe operating status.
In STOP mode, the motor starter responds according to how it was parameterized for the
CPU STOP state. The CPU STOP state can be circumvented with the manual local control
(Local Control) function. If the CPU is switched off, a motor can be switched on in the motor
starter's commissioning mode.
You will find additional information in the Motor starter

Commissioning
11.6.3 RUN mode
Behavior
In "RUN" mode the cyclic, time-driven, and interrupt-driven program is executed. Addresses
that are in the "Automatic Update" process image are automatically updated in each program
cycle. See also the section Process images and process image partitions (Page 139).
Execution of the user program

Once the CPU has read the inputs, the cyclic program is executed from the first instruction to
the last instruction.
If you have configured a minimum cycle time, the CPU will not end the cycle until this
minimum cycle time is finished even if the user program is completed sooner.
A cycle monitoring time is set to ensure that the cyclic program is completed within a
specified time. You can change the cycle monitoring time to suit your requirements. If the
cyclic program has not finished running within this time, the system responds with a time
error.
Further events such as hardware interrupts and diagnostics interrupts can interrupt the cyclic
program flow and prolong the cycle time.
Reference
Further information about cycle and response times is available in the Function Manual
Cycle and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).
11.6.4 Operating mode transitions
Operating modes and operating mode transitions

The following figure shows the operating modes and the operating mode transitions:
Figure 11-9 Operating modes and operating mode transitions

Commissioning
The table below shows the effects of the operating mode transitions:
Table 11- 7 Operating mode transitions
No. Operating mode transitions Effects

① POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU switches to The CPU clears the non-retentive memory, and re-
STARTUP "STARTUP" mode if: sets the content of non-retentive DBs to the start
values of the load memory. Retentive memory and
• The hardware configuration and
retentive DB contents are retained.
program blocks are consistent.
The 500 newest entries in the diagnostics buffer are
• Startup type "Warm restart - RUN" is retained.
set.
Or
• Startup type "Warm restart - mode
before POWER OFF" is set and the
CPU was in RUN mode before
POWER OFF.
② POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU goes to The CPU clears the non-retentive memory, and re-
STOP "STOP" mode if: sets the content of non-retentive DBs to the start
program blocks are inconsistent.
Or retained.
• The "No restart" startup type is set.
Or
• Startup type "Warm restart - mode
before POWER OFF" is set and the
CPU was in STOP mode before
POWER OFF.

Commissioning
No. Operating mode transitions Effects

③ STOP → The CPU switches to "STARTUP" mode The CPU clears the non-retentive memory, and re-
STARTUP if: sets the content of non-retentive DBs to the start
program blocks are consistent.
• You set the CPU to "RUN" mode via retained.
the programming device and the
mode switch in is RUN position.
Or
• You set the mode switch from STOP
to RUN.
④ STARTUP → In the following cases, the CPU goes These operating mode transitions have no effect on
STOP from "STARTUP" to "STOP" mode data.
when:
• The CPU detects an error during
startup.
• You set the CPU to "STOP" via the
programming device or mode switch.
• The CPU executes a STOP com-
mand in the Startup OB.
⑤ STARTUP → In the following cases, the CPU goes

RUN from "STARTUP" to "RUN" mode when:
• The CPU has initialized the PLC
tags.
• The CPU has executed the startup
blocks successfully.
⑥ RUN → STOP In the following cases, the CPU goes

from "RUN" back to "STOP" mode when:
• The CPU detects an error which
prevents further work.
• The CPU executes a STOP com-
mand in the user program.
• You set the CPU to "STOP" via the
programming device or mode switch.

Commissioning
11.7 CPU memory reset

Basics of a memory reset
The CPU must be in STOP mode for a memory reset.
A memory reset returns the CPU to its "initial state".
Memory reset means:
● An existing online connection between your programming device/PC and the CPU is
terminated.
● The content of the work memory and the retentive and non-retentive data (applies only to
manual memory reset by the user) are deleted.
● The diagnostics buffer, time of day, IP address and the device name are retained.
● Subsequently the CPU is initialized with the loaded project data (hardware configuration,
code and data blocks, force jobs). The CPU copies this data from the load memory to the
work memory.
Result:
– If you set an IP address in the hardware configuration ("Set IP address in the project"
option) and a SIMATIC memory card with the project is in the CPU, this IP address is
valid after the memory reset.
– Data blocks no longer have current values but rather their configured start values.
– Force jobs remain active.
Detecting a CPU memory reset

The RUN/STOP LED flashes yellow at 2 Hz. After completion, the CPU switches to STOP.
The RUN/STOP LED is on (constant yellow light).
Result after memory reset

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after
memory reset.
Table 11- 8 Memory objects after memory reset
Memory object Content

Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Initialized
Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Retentive tags from technology objects Retained
(for example, adjustment values of absolute encoders)*
Diagnostics buffer entries Retained
IP address Retained
Device name Retained
Counter readings of the runtime meters Retained
Time of day Retained
* The retentive tags from technology objects are retained but the content of certain tags is re-initialized
in some cases.

Commissioning
11.7.1 Automatic memory reset
Possible causes of automatic memory reset

The CPU executes an automatic memory reset if an error occurs that prevents normal
further processing.
Causes of such errors are:
● User program is too large, and cannot be completely loaded into work memory.
● The project data on the SIMATIC memory card is corrupt, for example, because a file was
deleted.
● If you remove or insert the SIMATIC memory card and the backed-up retentive data
differs in structure from that of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card.
11.7.2 Manual memory reset
Reason for a manual memory reset

CPU memory reset is required to reset the CPU to its "original state".
CPU memory reset

Two options are available for performing a CPU memory reset:
● Using the mode selector
● Using STEP 7
Procedure using the mode selector
Note
Memory reset ↔ Reset to factory settings
The procedure described below also corresponds to the procedure for resetting to factory
settings:
• Selector operation with inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes a memory reset
• Selector operation without inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes reset to factory
settings

Commissioning
To reset the CPU memory using the mode selector, proceed as follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
Result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the selector in this position until the
RUN/STOP LED lights up for the 2nd time and remains continuously lit (this takes three
seconds). After this, release the switch.
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes memory reset.
For information on resetting the CPU to factory settings, refer to the section Resetting the
CPU to factory settings (Page 249).
Procedure using STEP 7

For a memory reset of the CPU using STEP 7 proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Online Tools" task card of the CPU.
2. Click the "MRES" button in the "CPU control panel" pane.
3. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The CPU switches to STOP mode and performs a memory reset.

Commissioning
11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation
11.8 Reassigning parameters during operation

Introduction
You have the option of reassigning the parameters for the ET 200SP I/O modules during
operation.
Changing parameters during operation

You make the parameter settings of the I/O modules using data records. Each I/O module
has a separate data record. The instruction "WRREC" applies the changed parameters to
the I/O module. The parameters that you have set with STEP 7 are not changed. After a
POWER OFF/POWER ON of the ET 200SP, the parameters set with STEP 7 are valid
again.
If you are using the CPU as an I-device, you reassign the parameters of the I/O modules via
the I-device.
Note
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can evaluate OB83 for this
purpose. After inserting a module, the CPU does not call OB83 until the module has started
up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures the execution of the data record
operations without errors.
Note
You need to transfer the new parameters with the "WRREC" instruction after a POWER
OFF/POWER ON of the ET 200SP.
Instruction for parameter assignment

The following instruction is provided for assigning parameters to the I/O module in the user
program:
Instruction Application
"WRREC" Transfer the modifiable parameters to the addressed ET 200SP module.
Error message
In the event of an error, the following return values are reported:
Table 11- 9 Error message
Error code Meaning

80E0H Error in header information
80E1H Parameter error
Reference
You will find the setup of the parameter data record in the manuals of the I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/55679691/133300).

Commissioning
11.9 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration
11.9.1 Overview
Backup from online device

You make changes where necessary in the system operation. You add new devices,
replace existing devices or adapt the user program. If these changes result in undesirable
behavior, you can restore the plant to an earlier state. Before you load a changed
configuration to the CPU, first use the option "Backup from online device" to create a
complete backup of the current device status.
Upload from device (software)

With the option "Upload from device (software)", you load the software project data from the
CPU to an existing CPU in the project.
Upload device as new station

If you are operating a new PG/PC on a system, the STEP 7 project that was used to create
the system configuration might not be available. In this case, you upload the data to a project
in your PG/PC with the "Upload device as new station" option.
Snapshot of the monitor values

To allow you to restore the actual values after changes, back up the actual values of the data
blocks with the "Snapshot of the monitor values" option.
Overview of backup types

The table below shows the backup of CPU data depending on the selected type of backup
and its specific characteristics:
Backup from online Upload from device Upload device as Snapshot of the
device (software) new station monitor values
Current values of all DBs ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(global and instance data blocks) 1)
Blocks of the type OB, FC, FB and ✓ ✓ ✓ --
DB
PLC tags ✓ ✓ ✓ --
(tag names and constant names)
Technology objects ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 3)
Hardware configuration ✓ -- ✓ --
Actual values (bit memories, tim- ✓ -- -- --
ers, counters)*
Contents of the SIMATIC memory ✓ -- -- --
card
Archives, recipes ✓ -- -- --
Entries in the diagnostics buffer -- -- -- --

Commissioning
Backup from online Upload from device Upload device as Snapshot of the
device (software) new station monitor values
Current time -- -- -- --
Properties of the type of backup
Backup possible for fail-safe CPUs ✓ ✓ 2) -- ✓
Backup can be edited -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Backup possible in operating mode STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP
1) Only the values of the tags that are set as retentive are saved.
2) Only possible in the STOP operating state and for individual fail-safe blocks.
3) Nur die High_Speed_Counter and SSI_Absolute_Encoder modules
Reference
You can find more information on the different backup types in the STEP 7 online help.
Emergency address (emergency IP)

The emergency address (emergency IP address) of a CPU was conceived for diagnostic and
downloading functions, e.g. if the CPU can no longer be reached via the IP protocol due to
loading of an incorrect project. You can find information on the emergency address in the
Communication (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/59192925/en) function
manual.
Archiving multilingual project texts

When you configure a CPU, different categories of texts come into being, e.g.
● Object names (names of blocks, modules, tags, etc.)
● Comments (for blocks, networks, watch tables, etc.)
● Messages and diagnostic texts
Texts are provided by the system (e.g. diagnostic buffer texts) or are created during
configuration (e.g. messages).
In a project, texts exist in one single language or in several languages after a translation
process. You can maintain project texts in all languages, which are at your disposal in the
project navigator (Languages & Resources > Project Texts). The texts arising during
configuration can be loaded into the CPU.
The following texts containing the project data are loaded into the CPU in the chosen
languages and are also used by the Web server:
● Diagnostic buffer texts (not editable)
● Module status texts (not editable)
● Message texts with associated text lists
● Tag comments and step comments for S7 GRAPH and PLC Code Viewer
● Comments in watch tables

Commissioning
The following texts containing the project languages are also loaded into the CPU in the
chosen languages, but are not used by the Web server:
● Comments in tag tables (for tags and constants)
● Comments in global data blocks
● Comments of elements in block interfaces of FBs, FCs, DBs and UDTs
● Network titles in data blocks that are written in ladder logic (LAD), function block diagram
(FBD) or statement list (STL)
● Block comments
● Network comments
● Comments of LAD and FBD elements
The CPUs support archiving of multilingual project texts in up to three different project
languages. If the project texts for a particular project language nevertheless exceed the
memory space reserved for them, the project cannot be downloaded to the CPU. The
download is canceled with a notice that insufficient memory space is available. In such a
case, take measures to reduce the required storage space, for example by shortening
comments.
Note
Size of the SIMATIC memory card
If, when loading projects, the required memory space is more extensive/larger than the
memory space on the
SIMATIC memory card used, the download to the CPU is canceled. You receive an error
message.
Therefore, make sure that there is enough available storage space on your SIMATIC
memory card for loading projects.
You will find information on reading out the storage space capacity utilization of the CPU and
the SIMATIC memory card in the Structure and use of the CPU memory
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/59193101/en) function manual.
You will find information on parameterization of multilingual project texts in STEP 7 in the
STEP 7 online help.

Commissioning
11.10 Time synchronization
Introduction
All CPUs are equipped with an internal clock. The clock shows:
● The time of day with a resolution of 1 millisecond
● The date and the day of the week
The CPU takes into account the time change caused by daylight saving time.
You can synchronize the time of the CPUs with an NTP server in NTP mode (NTP: Network
Time Protocol).
Operating principle
In NTP mode, the device sends time queries at regular intervals (in client mode) to the NTP
server in the subnet (LAN). Based on the replies of the servers, the most reliable and most
accurate time is calculated and the time of day of the CPU is synchronized. The advantage
of this mode is that it allows the time to be synchronized across subnets. You can
synchronize the time of day of up to a maximum of four NTP servers. You address a
communications processor or an HMI device, for example, as sources for time
synchronization via the IP addresses.
The update interval defines the interval between the time queries (in seconds). The value
range of the interval is between 10 seconds and one day. In NTP mode, it is generally UTC
(Universal Time Coordinated) that is transferred. UTC corresponds to GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time).
NTP server for the ET 200SP CPU

You can assign an ET 200SP CPU to up to 4 NTP servers.
In STEP 7 you enable the time synchronization in NTP mode. You can configure up to four
NTP servers for the ET 200SP CPU in STEP 7.
If you have enabled time synchronization via NTP for the CPU, then you can enter the IP
addresses of up to four NTP servers in the user program. For this, use the "T_CONFIG"
instruction.
Enabling time synchronization via NTP server

To enable the time synchronization for the ET 200SP CPU via NTP servers, follow these
steps:
1. In the Inspector window, navigate in the properties of the CPU to "General" > "PROFINET
interface" > Time synchronization".
2. Enable the option "Enable time synchronization via NTP server".

Commissioning
Configuring NTP server in STEP 7

To configure one or more NTP servers for the ET 200SP CPU, follow these steps:
1. In the Inspector window, navigate in the properties of the CPU to "General" > "PROFINET
interface" > Time synchronization".
2. Enter the IP addresses of up to four NTP servers at the parameters "Server 1" to "Server
4".
3. Set the interval of the time queries at the "Update interval" parameter. Set the update
interval to between 10 s and 86400 s.
Changing the IP addresses of the NTP servers with the "T_CONFIG" instruction
For the CPU, you can change the addresses of up to four NTP servers during runtime with
the T_CONFIG instruction.
Requirements: You have configured at least one NTP server in STEP 7. Even if you have
configured only one NTP server, you can enter up to four NTP servers in the T_CONFIG
instruction.
Proceed as follows to change the IP addresses of the NTP servers with the T_CONFIG
instruction:
1. Enter the IP addresses for the NTP servers in a tag of data type IF_CONF_NTP.
2. Interconnect the tag of data type IF_CONF_NTP at the block parameter CONF_DATA of
the T_CONFIG instruction.
3. Call the T_CONFIG instruction in the user program.
Result: The addresses of the NTP servers from the T_CONFIG instruction are transferred to
the CPU. The NTP server addresses configured in STEP 7 are overwritten.
If necessary, you can change the addresses of the NTP servers several times with
T_CONFIG.
Reference
For additional information on time synchronization in the automation environment, refer to
the following FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/86535497).

Commissioning
11.10.1 Example: Configuring and changing NTP server
Configuring time synchronization with your own NTP server
Automation task
You use your own server in your network. Your own server provides you with the following
advantages:
● Protection against unauthorized accesses from outside
● Every device that you synchronize with your own NTP server uses the same time.
You want to synchronize the ET 200SP CPU with this NTP server.
Conditions and parameters

You have your own NTP server in your network with the IP address 192.168.1.15.
They are located in STEP 7 in the Inspector window in the properties of the PROFINET
interface X1.
Solution
1. Navigate to "Properties > General > PROFINET interface > Time synchronization > NTP
mode".
2. For "Server 1" enter the IP address of the NTP server: 192.168.1.15.
Figure 11-10 Example: Configuring the NTP server
3. Download the hardware configuration to the CPU.
Result
The ET 200SP CPU synchronizes the time with the NTP server 192.168.1.15.

Commissioning
Changing the IP address of an NTP server in the user program
Automation task
You change the NTP server in your network. The new NTP server has the address
"192.168.1.10".
You want to change the IP address of the NTP server with which your ET 200SP CPU
synchronizes via the user program.
The example shows how you change the IP address of the NTP server to "192.168.1.10"via
the user program with the instruction "T_CONFIG".

Requirements:
● You have enabled the option "Enable time synchronization via NTP server" for your CPU
in STEP 7.
● You have configured the following NTP servers in STEP 7: Server 1 "192.168.1.15"
To change the IP addressed for NTP servers, use the following block parameter of the
"T_CONFIG" instruction:
● Req: A positive edge at the block parameter "Req" starts a job of the "T_CONFIG"
instruction.
● Interface: Enter the hardware identifier of the PROFINET interface 1 of the CPU at the
"Interface" block parameter. In this example, the HW ID is "64".
● Conf_Data: Area in which you save the IP addresses of the NTP server. Use the data
type "IF_CONF_NTP" for this purpose.

Commissioning
Solution
To change the IP address of the NTP server in the user program to "192.168.1.10", follow
these steps:
1. Create a global data block in the project tree under "Program blocks > Add new block".
Name the global data block "NTP".
2. Create a tag of the data type "IF_CONF_NTP" in the global data block "NTP".
Figure 11-11 Example: Data block with IF_CONF_NTP
3. Create a "T_CONFIG" instruction in the user program.

4. Connect the "T_CONFIG" instruction as follows.
Figure 11-12 Example T_CONFIG: Changing the NTP server

Commissioning
5. In the user program, assign the IP address 192.168.1.10 to the data type
"IF_CONF_NTP":
"NTP".NTP_Server.NTP_IP[1].ADDR[1] := 192;
6. You change the IP address of the NTP server by generating a positive edge for the tag
"change_NTP-Server" in the user program.
"NTP"."change_NTP-Server" := true;
Result
The ET 200SP CPU synchronizes the time with the NTP server 192.168.1.10.

Commissioning
11.11 Identification and maintenance data
11.11.1 Reading out and entering I&M data
I&M data
Identification and maintenance data (I&M data) is information saved on the module. The data
is:
● Read-only (I-data) or
● Readable/writable (M-data)
Identification data (I&M0): Manufacturer information about the module that can only be read.
Some identification data is also printed on the housing of the module, for example article
number and serial number.
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3): Plant-dependent information, e.g. installation location.
Maintenance data is created during configuration and downloaded to the module.
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system support identification data (I&M0 to
I&M3).
The I&M identification data supports you in the following activities:
● Checking the plant configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a plant
● Correcting errors in a plant
Modules can be clearly identified online using the I&M identification data.
STEP 7 allows you to read the identification I&M data (see STEP 7 online help).
Note
The BusAdapter and the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF support the identification data
I&M0 to I&M4 (signature).
Options for reading out I&M data

● Via the user program
● Via STEP 7 or HMI devices
● Via the CPU web server

Commissioning
Reading I&M data via the user program

You have the following options to read the modules' I&M data in the user program:
● Using the RDREC instruction
The record structure for distributed modules that are accessible via
PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP, is described in the chapter Record structure for I&M data
(Page 228).
● Using the Get_IM_Data instruction
Reference
The description of the instructions can be found in the STEP 7 online help.
Reading I&M data via STEP 7

Requirements: There must be an online connection to the CPU/interface module.
To read I&M data using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the project tree, under "Distributed I/O" select the IO device IM 155-6 PN ST (for
example).
2. Select > IO device > Online & diagnostics > Identification & Maintenance.
Entering maintenance data via STEP 7

STEP 7 assigns a default module name. You can enter the following information:
● Plant designation (I&M1)
● Location identifier (I&M1)
● Installation date (I&M2)
● Additional information (I&M3)
To enter maintenance data via STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor, select the interface module, for
example.
2. In the properties under "General", select the "Identification & Maintenance" area and
enter the data.
During the loading of the hardware configuration, the I&M data is also loaded.
Procedure for reading I&M data via the Web server

The procedure is described in detail in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) Function Manual.

Commissioning
11.11.2 Data record structure for I&M data
Reading I&M records via the user program (distributed via PROFINET IO)
You directly access specific identification data using Read data record ("RDREC"
instruction). You obtain the corresponding part of the identification data under the relevant
data record index.
The data records are structured as follows:
Table 11- 10 Basic structure of data records with I&M identification data
Content Length (bytes) Coding (hex)

Header information
BlockType 2 I&M0: 0020H
I&M1: 0021H
I&M2: 0022H
I&M3: 0023H
BlockLength 2 I&M0: 0038H
I&M1: 0038H
I&M2: 0012H
I&M3: 0038H
BlockVersionHigh 1 01
BlockVersionLow 1 00
Identification data
Identification data I&M0/index AFF0H: 54
(see table below) I&M1/index AFF1H: 54
I&M2/index AFF2H: 16
I&M3/index AFF3H: 54
Table 11- 11 Data record structure for I&M identification data
Identification data Access Default Explanation

Identification data 0: (data record index AFF0 hex)
VendorIDHigh Read (1 byte) 00H This is where the name of the manufac-
VendorIDLow Read (1 byte) 2 AH turer is stored (42D = SIEMENS AG).
Order_ID Read (20 bytes) 6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 Article number of the module (e.g. of the
interface module)
IM_SERIAL_NUMBER Read (16 bytes) - Serial number (device-specific)
IM_HARDWARE_REVISION Read (2 bytes) 1 Corresponding HW version
IM_SOFTWARE_REVISION Read Firmware version Provides information about the firmware
(1 byte) V version of the module
• SWRevisionPrefix
• IM_SWRevision_Functional_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Enhancement
• IM_SWRevision_Bug_Fix (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Commissioning
Identification data Access Default Explanation

• IM_SWRevision_Internal_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH
Change
IM_REVISION_COUNTER Read (2 bytes) 0000H Provides information about parameter
changes on the module
(not used)
IM_PROFILE_ID Read (2 bytes) 0000H Generic Device
IM_PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE Read (2 bytes) 0005H Interface modules/BusAdapters
0003H I/O modules and motor starters
0001H CPU
IM_VERSION Read 0101H Provides information on the version of
(1 byte) the identification data
• IM_Version_Major
(0101H = Version 1.1)
• IM_Version_Minor (1 byte)
IM_SUPPORTED Read (2 bytes) 000EH Provides information about the available

identification data (I&M1 to I&M3)
Maintenance data 1: (data record index AFF1 hex)
IM_TAG_FUNCTION Read/write (32 - Enter a module identifier here that is
bytes) unique plant-wide.
IM_TAG_LOCATION Read/write (22 - Enter the installation location of the mod-
bytes) ule here.
IM_DATE Read/write (16 YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM Enter the installation date of the module
bytes) here.
IM_DESCRIPTOR Read/write (54 - Enter a comment describing the module.
bytes)
Reading I&M data records with data record 255 (distributed via PROFIBUS DP)
The modules support standardized access to identification data via DS 255 (index 65000 to
65003). For further information on the DS 255 data structure, refer to the specifications of the
Profile Guidelines Part 1: Identification & Maintenance Functions, Order No.: 3.502,
Version 2.1, May 2016

Commissioning
11.11.3 Example: Read out firmware version of the CPU with Get_IM_Data
Automation task
You want to check whether the modules in your automation system have the current
firmware. You can find the firmware version of the modules in the I&M0 data. The I&M0 data
is the basic information for a device. The I&M0 data contains information such as:
● Manufacturer ID
● Order number, serial number
● Hardware and firmware version
To read out the I&M0 data, use the "Get_IM_Data" instruction. You read the I&M0 data of all
the modules in the user program of the CPU using "Get_IM_Data" instructions and store it in
a data block.

To read out the I&M data of the CPU, use the following block parameters of the
"Get_IM_Data" instruction:
● LADDR: Enter the HW ID of the module at the block parameter "LADDR".
● IM_TYPE: Enter the I&M data number (e.g. "0" for I&M0 data) at the "IM_TYPE" block
parameter.
● DATA: Area for storing the read I&M data (e.g. in a global data block). Store I&M0 data in
an area of data type "IM0_Data".
This example shows you how to read out the I&M0 data of an ET 200SP CPU. To read out
the I&M0 data of a different module, simply use the HW ID of the module at the LADDR
parameter.
Solution
Proceed as follows to read out the I&M0 data of the CPU:
1. Create a global data block to store the I&M0 data.
2. Create a structure of the data type "IM0_Data" in the global data block. You can assign
any name to the structure ("imData") in this case.
Figure 11-13 Example: Data block for I&M data

Commissioning
3. Create the "Get_IM_Data" instruction in the user program, e.g. in OB 1.

4. Connect the "Get_IM_Data" instruction as follows:
Figure 11-14 Example: Calling the "Get_IM_Data" instruction
5. Call the "Get_IM_Data" instruction in the user program.
Result
The "Get_IM_Data" instruction has stored the I&M0 data in the data block.
You can view the I&M0 data online in STEP 7, for example, in the data block with the
"Monitor all" button. The CPU in the example is a 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK01-0AK0)
with the firmware version V2.5.
Figure 11-15 Example: I&M0 data of an ET 200SP CPU

Commissioning
11.12 Shared commissioning of projects
11.12 Shared commissioning of projects
Team Engineering
In Team Engineering several users from various engineering systems work on a project at
the same time and access one ET 200SP CPU.
The users can edit separate parts of a master project independently of one another at the
same time. The changes of the other editors are displayed in a synchronization dialog during
the loading of the configuration in the CPU and synchronized automatically, if possible.
Certain online functions can also be executed at the same time from several engineering
systems on a shared CPU, such as:
● Monitoring blocks on the CPU
● Modifying blocks on the CPU
● Trace functions
You can find detailed information on the topic of Team Engineering in the STEP 7 online
help.

Maintenance 12
12.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules/motor starters (hot swapping)
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports removal and insertion of I/O modules and
motor starters (hot swapping) during operation (RUN mode):
● CPU/interface module HF, HS: You can remove and insert any number of I/O
modules/motor starters.
● ST, BA interface module: You can only remove and insert one I/O module/motor starter.
This section provides further information on removing and inserting I/O modules/motor
starters.
I/O modules/motor starters must not be removed or inserted during operation (RUN
operating state) in hazardous areas.
Requirements
The following table describes which modules you may insert and remove under which
conditions:
Table 12- 1 Removal and insertion of modules
Modules Removal and Conditions

insertion
CPU No ---
BusAdapter No ---
CM DP module No ---
Interface module No ---
I/O modules Yes • Digital output modules: Only when load is switched off
• Digital modules: For load voltage above the safe extra-low voltage: Only with
switched off load voltage supply
• Technology modules: Only with switched off supply voltage L+
• AI Energy Meter ST:
– Only when measuring voltage on primary side is switched off, or
– Without the special current transformer terminal, measuring voltage and load
current must be through the converters, which means the machine or the load
must be switched off in the process. With the special terminal, the process
can continue because the current transformer is isolated safely. However, the
measuring voltage on the module, at connections UL1-UL3, still needs to be
isolated.
PotDis- Yes Only in de-energized state.
TerminalBlock
Motor starter Yes 1) Only when the load is disconnected; when switched on, the motor starter switches off
automatically when the rotary interlock is operated.
Server module No ---
1) The motor starter also counts as removed in the parking position

Maintenance
NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert digital output modules with the load switched on or technology
modules with the supply voltage switched on, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system or the connected sensors may be damaged as a
result.
Therefore, a digital output module may only be inserted and removed when the load is
switched off and a technology module may only be inserted and removed when the supply
voltage is switched off.
NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST with the primary-side voltage switched on
at the current transformer, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system may be damaged as a result.
For this reason, remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST only in the following cases:
• When measuring voltage is switched off on the primary side, or
• When a special current transformer terminal is used that short-circuits the secondary
side of the transformer when the module is removed
Do not remove or insert the AI Energy Meter ST until you have removed this current
transformer terminal. With the special terminal, the process can continue because the
current transformer is isolated safely. However, the measuring voltage on the module at the
connections UL1-UL3 still needs to be isolated.
WARNING
Inserting a motor starter can result in dangerous system states. The motor starter can
restart again autonomously if an ON command is active.
This can result in serious injury caused by connected devices that are automatically started
up.
Withdraw and insert a motor starter only after disconnecting the load.

Maintenance
Removing and inserting I/O module or motor starter with CPU/interface module HF, HS
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules/motor starters during operation. The
CPU/interface module and the inserted I/O modules/motor starters remain in operation.
NOTICE
Reaction of the CPU to removal and insertion of the ET 200SP server module
Please note that the backplane bus is deactivated when you remove the server module,
regardless of the CPU operating state. Also note that the outputs do not adopt their
configured substitute value behavior when you remove the server module.
This means you should not remove the server module when the CPU is in STARTUP, RUN
and STOP modes. If you have nevertheless removed the server module, perform a
POWER OFF/POWER ON after you have inserted the server module again.
Removing and inserting BusAdapter or CM DP module

Do not remove or insert the BusAdapter or CM DP module when the supply voltage is
switched on. If you have removed the BusAdapter or the CM DP module after CPU startup,
the supply voltage of the BusAdapter or the CM DP module is switched off automatically. To
switch on the supply voltage again, you need to perform a POWER OFF/POWER ON after
inserting the BusAdapter/CM DP module.
Removing and inserting I/O module or motor starter with interface module ST, BA
1. You can remove one I/O module/one motor starter during operation. If you remove
another I/O module/motor starter, this results in a station stop of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system:
– All I/O modules/motor starters of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail → Substitute
value behavior.
– The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller and report
diagnostics.
Note
If you want to replace several I/O modules/motor starters during operation, you must
replace them one after the other.
2. If you insert all but one of the I/O modules/motor starters withdrawn during operation, all
I/O modules will start up again.
Note
I/O modules/motor starters inserted in empty slots and then removed are also regarded
as withdrawn during operation.

Maintenance
3. After a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage 1L+ of the interface module, all
available I/O modules/motor starters start up again in line with the configuration.
Evaluation of the I/O modules/motor starters removed during operation starts again
(see 1).
Removing I/O modules

To remove an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module.
2. Pull the I/O module out of the BaseUnit, parallel in a forward direction.
Figure 12-1 Removing I/O modules
See also
Interface modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)

Maintenance
12.2 Changing the type of an I/O module
12.2 Changing the type of an I/O module
Introduction
The coding element is a two-part element. When shipped from the factory, both parts are in
the I/O module. When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding
element clicks into the BaseUnit. This mechanically prevents the insertion of a different
module type.
There are two versions of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Mechanical coding element: Ensures the mechanical coding described above.
● Electronic coding element: In addition to the above-mentioned mechanical coding, this
version also has an electronic, rewritable memory for module-specific configuration data
(such as the F-destination address for fail-safe modules, parameter data for IO link
master).
Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 33).
NOTICE
Do not manipulate the coding element
Making changes to the coding element may cause dangerous conditions in your plant
and/or result in damage to the outputs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
To avoid physical damage, do not manipulate the coding.
Changing the type of an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To make a type change for an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Push the coding element out of the BaseUnit using a screwdriver.
2. Put the coding element back onto the removed I/O module.

Maintenance
12.3 Replacing an I/O module
3. Insert the new I/O module (other module type) into the BaseUnit until you hear it click into
place.
4. Label the new I/O module.
① Coding element
Figure 12-2 Changing the type of an I/O module
12.3 Replacing an I/O module
Introduction
When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding element clicks into the
BaseUnit. When you replace an I/O module with the same type of module, the correct coding
element is already present in the BaseUnit.
Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 33).
Replacing an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To replace an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Remove the coding element (part) from the underside of the new I/O module.
2. Insert the new I/O module (same module type) into the BaseUnit until you hear it click into
place.
3. Mark the new I/O module (labeling strip, equipment labeling plate).

Maintenance
12.4 Replacing a motor starter
12.4 Replacing a motor starter

The SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter is wired.
To replace a SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the mechanical rotary interlock counter-clockwise to the assembly/disassembly
position.
Note
Operating position/READY
Turn the mechanical rotary interlock out of the READY position only in the current-free
state (motor off).
2. Remove the SIMATIC ET 200SP motor starter from the BaseUnit.

3. Assemble the new motor starter as described.
Note
Mounting the motor starter
You will find out how to mount the motor starter in chapter "Mounting/disassembly of
motor starters (Page 118)".
WARNING
When you replace the motor starter, the motor starter can restart again autonomously if an
ON command is active. This can result in property damage or serious injury caused by
connected devices that are automatically started up.
Revoke the ON commands on the motor starter before replacing the motor starter.
CAUTION

Maintenance
12.5 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit
Introduction
The terminal box is part of the BaseUnit. You can replace the terminal box if necessary. You
do not need to dismantle the BaseUnit to do this.
The power and AUX buses of the potential group are not interrupted when you replace the
terminal box.
Requirements
● The BaseUnit is mounted, wired and fitted with an I/O module.
● The terminal may only be replaced when the supply voltage is switched off.
Required tools
Procedure
Watch the video sequence: "Replace terminal box on BaseUnit"
Proceed as follows to replace the terminal box on a BaseUnit:
1. If present, turn off the supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
2. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module and pull the
module out of the BaseUnit.
3. Disconnect the wiring on the BaseUnit.
4. The release button of the terminal box is located on the underside of the BaseUnit. Use a
screwdriver to push in the small opening at an angle from above.
5. Swivel the screwdriver slightly upwards to loosen the locking mechanism of the terminal
box and lever the terminal box up out of the BaseUnit at the same time.
6. Remove the coding element (part) from the terminal box and press it onto the coding
element (part) of the I/O module that you removed in step 2.
7. Insert the new terminal box into the BaseUnit at the top and swivel it downwards until it
clips into the BaseUnit.
8. Wire up the BaseUnit.

Maintenance
9. Insert the I/O module into the BaseUnit.

10.Switch on a supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
Figure 12-3 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

Maintenance
12.6 Firmware update
Introduction
During operation it may be necessary to update the firmware (e.g. to extend the available
functions).
Update the firmware of the CPU/interface module and the I/O modules using firmware files.
The retentive data is retained after the firmware has been updated.
Requirement
Modules with firmware version V0.0.0 do not support the "firmware update" function.
● You have downloaded the file(s) for the firmware update from the Product Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps) web page.
On this web page, select:
– Automation Technology > Automation Systems > Industrial Automation Systems
SIMATIC > SIMATIC ET 200 I/O Systems > ET 200 systems for the cabinet >
ET 200SP.
Figure 12-4 ET 200SP in the product tree
From this position, navigate to the specific type of module that you want to update. To
continue, click on the "Software downloads" link under "Support". Save the desired
firmware update files.

Maintenance
Figure 12-5 Selecting the software downloads
● Before installing the firmware update, make sure that the modules are not being used.
● Modules with firmware version V0.0.0 do not support the "firmware update" function.
Note
Firmware update of I/O modules
The L+ supply voltage must be present on the module at the start of and during the firmware
update.
Additional requirement for fail-safe modules
WARNING
Check the firmware version for fail-safe approval
When using a new firmware version, always check that the version is approved for use in
the module in question.
The attachments of the certificate
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200) for SIMATIC
Safety specify the firmware version that is approved.

Maintenance
Options for the firmware update

The following options are available for updating firmware:
● Online in STEP 7 via Online & Diagnostics
● Online in STEP 7 via accessible devices (PROFINET)
● Using a SIMATIC memory card (possible for CPU and central I/O modules)
● Via the integrated Web server (possible for CPU as well as centralized and distributed
I/O modules)
● Online via the SIMATIC Automation Tool
Note
Firmware files of the CPU
If you perform a CPU update with STEP 7, you require STEP 7 (TIA Portal as of V13
Update 3).
The table below provides an overview of the media that can be used to update the firmware
of a specific module.
Table 12- 2 Overview of firmware update options
Firmware update CPU Interface module I/O module

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) ✓ 1) ✓ ✓
STEP 7 (V5.5 SP2 or higher) 2) -- ✓ ✓
Accessible devices ✓ ✓ ✓
SIMATIC memory card ✓ -- ✓
Web server of the CPU ✓ -- ✓
SIMATIC Automation Tool ✓ ✓ ✓
1) V13 update 3 or higher
2) If the firmware files are only available in this format, you can also install the files using STEP 7
(TIA Portal) but not the SIMATIC memory card or the Web server.

Maintenance
Firmware update for the motor starter

The following options are available for updating firmware for the motor starter.
● Online via PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP (with STEP 7)
● Via the integrated Web server (possible for CPU as well as centralized and distributed I/O
modules)
● With the TIA Portal:
– As of SIMATIC STEP 7 V13 SP1 with installed HSP for the ET 200SP motor starter
– SIMATIC STEP 7 V14 and higher
Over a SIMATIC memory card
● With SIMATIC STEP 7 version V5.5 SP4 and higher
● For fail-safe motor starters with the TIA Portal Version V14 SP1 or higher and installed
HSP.
Note
The firmware update for fail-safe motor starters must take place in a separate ET 200SP
system in which only the fail-safe motor starter that is to be updated is inserted.
Installation of the firmware update
WARNING
Risk of impermissible system states
The CPU switches to STOP mode or the interface module to "station failure" as a result of
the firmware update being installed. STOP or station failure can have an adverse effect on
the operation of an online process or a machine.
Unexpected operation of a process or a machine can lead to fatal or severe injuries and/or
to material damages.
Make sure that the CPU/interface module is not executing any active process before
installing the firmware update.

Maintenance
Procedure online in STEP 7 via Online & Diagnostics

Requirements: There is an online connection between the CPU/module and PG/PC.
Proceed as follows to perform an online firmware update via STEP 7:
1. Select the module in the device view.
2. Select the "Online & diagnostics" command from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the "Firmware update" group in the "Functions" folder.
4. Click the "Browse" button to select the path to the firmware update files in the "Firmware
update" area.
5. Select the suitable firmware file. The table in the firmware update area lists all modules
for which an update is possible with the selected firmware file.
6. Click the "Run update" button. If the module can interpret the selected file, the file is
downloaded to the module.
Updating the firmware
The "Run firmware after update" check box is always selected.
When the loading process is complete, the CPU adopts the firmware and then operates with
this new firmware.
Note
If a firmware update is interrupted, you need to remove and insert the module before starting
the firmware update again.
Procedure online in STEP 7 via accessible devices

To perform a firmware update online via accessible devices, follow these steps:
1. From the "Online" menu, select the "Accessible devices" menu item.
2. In the "Accessible devices" dialog, search for the accessible devices for the selected
PROFINET interface.
3. To go to a device in the project tree, select the desired device from the list of accessible
devices and click the "Show" button.
4. In the project tree, select the "Online & diagnostics" option of the relevant device and
perform the firmware update under the category "Functions/Firmware Update" (CPU,
Local modules).

Maintenance
Procedure using the SIMATIC memory card

To perform a firmware update using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Insert a SIMATIC memory card into the SD card reader of your programming
device/computer.
2. To store the update file on the SIMATIC memory card, select the SIMATIC memory card
in the "Card Reader/USB memory" folder in the project tree.
3. Select the "Card Reader/USB memory > Create firmware update memory card"
command in the "Project" menu.
4. Use a file selection dialog to navigate to the firmware update file. In a further step you can
decide whether you want to delete the content of the SIMATIC memory card or whether
you want to add the firmware update files to the SIMATIC memory card.
5. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.
Point to note when updating firmware for analog modules and the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-
Link communication module
If you want to update firmware for analog modules or the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
communication module, you must supply a load current of 24 V DC to the modules through
the infeed element.
Procedure
1. Remove any inserted SIMATIC memory card.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.
3. The firmware update begins shortly after the SIMATIC memory card has been inserted.
4. Remove the SIMATIC memory card after the firmware update has been completed.
The RUN LED on the CPU lights up yellow, the MAINT LED flashes yellow.
If you want to use the SIMATIC memory card later as a program card, delete the firmware
update files manually.
Note
If your hardware configuration contains several modules, the CPU updates all affected
modules in the slot sequence, which means in ascending order of the module position in the
STEP 7 device configuration.
Note
Memory size of the SIMATIC memory card
If you perform a firmware update via the SIMATIC memory card, you must use a large
enough card based on the CPU used and the associated I/O modules.
Note the specified file sizes of the update files when downloading them from Siemens
Industry Online Support. The file size information is especially important when you perform
the firmware update not only for the CPU but also for the associated I/O modules,
communication modules, etc. The total size of the update files must not exceed the available
memory size of your SIMATIC memory card.
You can find more information on the capacity of SIMATIC memory cards in the section
Accessories/spare parts (Page 291)and in the function manual Structure and use of the
CPU memory (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/59193101).

Maintenance
Procedure: via the integrated Web server

The procedure is described in the Web server
Procedure: online via the SIMATIC Automation Tool

The procedure is described in the SIMATIC Automation Tool
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300) manual (included in the
SIMATIC Automation Tool).
Behavior during the firmware update

Note the following behavior of the relevant I/O module when carrying out a firmware update:
● The DIAG LED display flashes red.
● The I/O module retains its current diagnostic status.
● Diagnostics alarm: Channel temporarily unavailable (error code 31D/1FH)
● All outputs are in a current-free/voltage-free state
Note the following behavior when carrying out the firmware update of the motor starter:
● RN flashes green and ER flashes red.
● ST/OL flashes green and MAN flashes yellow.
● The motor starter powers up after completion of the firmware update. Diagnoses are
reset. The firmware update does not affect the TMM and the cooling time.
● The sensor supply of the DI module remains active.
Behavior after the firmware update

After the firmware update, check the firmware version of the updated module.
Reference
You will find more information on these procedures in the STEP 7 online help.

Maintenance
12.7 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings
12.7.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings
Introduction
The CPU can be reset to its delivery state using "Reset to factory settings". The function
deletes all information saved internally on the CPU.
If you want to remove a PROFINET CPU and use it elsewhere with a different program, or
put it into storage, we recommend that you reset the CPU to its factory settings. When
restoring the factory settings, remember that you also delete the IP address parameters.
Recommendation
Put the CPU into its delivery state if:
● You remove a CPU and use it elsewhere with a different program
● You return the CPU to stock
When resetting to factory settings, remember that the IP address parameters are also
deleted.
Options for resetting a CPU to factory settings

The following options are available for resetting the CPU to its factory settings:
● Using the mode selector
● Using STEP 7
● Using the SIMATIC Automation Tool
Procedure using the mode selector

Make sure that there is no SIMATIC memory card in the CPU and that the CPU is in STOP
mode (the RUN/STOP LED is lit yellow).
Note
Reset to factory settings ↔ Memory reset
The procedure described below also corresponds to the procedure for a memory reset:
• Selector operation with inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes a memory reset
• Selector operation without inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes reset to factory
settings

Maintenance
Perform a reset to factory settings when there is no SIMATIC memory card inserted as
follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
Result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the mode selector in this position until
the RUN/STOP LED lights up for the second time and remains lit (this takes 3 seconds).
After this, release the switch.
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.
Note
The IP address of the CPU is also deleted when the CPU is reset to the factory settings
through the mode selector.
For information on the memory reset of the CPU, refer to the section CPU memory reset
(Page 213).

Make sure that an online connection to the CPU exists.
To reset a CPU to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Open the Online and Diagnostics view of the CPU.
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Reset to factory settings" group.
3. If you want to keep the IP address, select the "Retain IP address" option button. If you
want to delete the IP address, select the "Reset IP address" option button.
Note
"Delete IP address" deletes all IP addresses, regardless of how you established the
online connection.
If there is a SIMATIC memory card inserted, selecting the "Delete IP address" option has
the following effect:
• The IP addresses are deleted and the CPU is reset to factory settings.
• The configuration (including IP address) on the SIMATIC memory card is then
downloaded to the CPU. If there is no saved configuration (because the SIMATIC
memory card has been cleared or formatted, for example), no new IP address is
assigned.
4. Click the "Reset" button.

Maintenance
5. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompts.

Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.
Procedure using the SIMATIC Automation Tool

The procedure is described in the SIMATIC Automation Tool
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98161300) manual (included in the
SIMATIC Automation Tool).
Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after the
reset to factory settings.
Table 12- 3 Result after resetting to factory settings
Memory object Content

Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Initialized
Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Certain retentive tags from technology objects Initialized
(e.g. adjustment values of absolute encoders)
Diagnostics buffer entries Initialized
IP address Depends on the procedure:
• Using mode switch: is deleted
• Using STEP 7: Depending on the setting of the "Keep IP
address"/"Delete IP address" option buttons
Device name Is set to "CPU"
Counter readings of the runtime meters Initialized
Time of day Is set to "00:00:00, 01.01.2012"
If a SIMATIC memory card was inserted prior to the factory reset, the CPU downloads the
configuration contained on the SIMATIC memory card (hardware and software). A
configured IP address then becomes valid again.
Reference
Additional information on the topic "Resetting to factory settings" can be found in the
Structure and use of the CPU memory
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193101) function manual, section on
memory areas and retentivity, and in the STEP 7 online help.

Maintenance
12.7.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings
Function
The "Reset to factory settings" function returns the interface module (PROFINET) to its
delivery state.
Reset options
● Using STEP 7 (online via PROFINET IO)
● Using a reset button on the interface module (on rear). Exception: The IM 155-6 PN BA
does not have this reset button. See section Resetting the interface module
(PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET button (Page 253).

To reset an interface module to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
Make sure that an online connection to the interface module exists.
1. Open the online and diagnostics view of the interface module.
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Reset to factory settings" group.
3. Click the "Reset" button.
4. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The interface module then performs "Reset to factory settings".
Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table shows the values of the interface module properties after a factory reset:
Table 12- 4 Properties of the interface module as shipped
Properties Value
Parameters Default setting
IP address Not available
Device name Not available
MAC address Available
I&M data Identification data (I&M0) available
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3, 4) reset *
Firmware version Available

Maintenance
Note
Failure of downstream stations is possible
Downstream stations on a bus segment can fail when the factory settings are restored on an
interface module.
Note
Behavior of the installed I/O modules during reset to factory settings
The I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system assume the unconfigured state
after a reset to factory settings. The interface module does not acquire any input data and
does not output any output data.
Reference
You will find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help.
12.7.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a
RESET button
Requirement
The supply voltage to the interface module is turned on.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting with a RESET button)
Procedure
Proceed as follows to reset an interface module to factory settings by means of the RESET
button:
1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 69)) and swivel it downwards.
2. The RESET button is located on the rear of the interface module behind a small opening:
Press a screwdriver into the small opening for at least 3 seconds to activate the RESET
button.

Maintenance
3. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 69)).
4. Assign parameters to the interface module again.
① Rear of the interface module

② RESET button
Figure 12-6 RESET button

Maintenance
12.8 Reaction to faults in fail-safe modules and fail-safe motor starters
Safe state (safety concept)

The basic principle behind the safety concept is the existence of a safe state for all process
variables.
Note
For digital F-modules, this safe state is the value "0". This applies to both sensors and
actuators. In the case of the fail-safe motor starters, the load is shut down in a fail-safe
manner.
Fault reactions and startup of the F-system

The safety function means that fail-safe modules use substitute values (safe state) instead of
process values (passivation of the fail-safe module) in the following situations:
● When the F-system is started up
● If errors are detected during safety-related communication between the F-CPU and the
F-module via the PROFIsafe safety protocol (communication error)
● If F-I/O faults or channel faults are detected (e.g. crossover or discrepancy errors)
Detected faults are written to the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU and communicated to the
safety program in the F-CPU.
F-modules cannot save errors as retentive data. After a POWER OFF / POWER ON, any
faults still existing are detected again during startup. However, you have the option of saving
faults in your safety program.
WARNING
For channels that you set to "deactivated" in STEP 7, no diagnostic response or error
handling is triggered when a channel fault occurs, not even when such a channel is
affected indirectly by a channel group fault ("Channel activated/deactivated" parameter).
Remedying faults in the F-system

To remedy faults in your F-system, follow the procedure described in IEC 61508-1:2010
section 7.15.2.4 and IEC 61508-2:2010 section 7.6.2.1 e.
The following steps must be performed:
1. Diagnosing and repairing the fault
2. Revalidation of the safety function
3. Recording in the service report

Maintenance
Substitute value output for fail-safe modules

In the case of F-modules with inputs, if there is passivation, the F-system provides substitute
values (0) for the safety program instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs.
In the case of F-modules with outputs, if there is passivation, the F-system transfers
substitute values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the
safety program. The output channels are de-energized. This also applies when the F-CPU
goes to STOP mode. Assignment of substitute values is not possible.
Substitute values are used either for the relevant channel only or for all channels of the
relevant failsafe module depending on:
● The F-system used
● The type of error that occurred (F-I/O, channel fault or communication error)
● The F-module parameter assignment
Reintegration of a fail-safe module

The system changes from fail-safe to process values (reintegration of an F-module) either
automatically or only after user acknowledgment in the safety program. If channel faults
occur, it may be necessary to remove and reinsert the F-module. A detailed listing of faults
requiring removal and insertion of the F-module can be found in the section Diagnostic
messages of the respective F-module.
After reintegration, the following occurs:
● In the case of an F-module with inputs, the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs is
made available to the safety program again
● In the case of an F-module with outputs, the output values provided in the safety program
are transferred to the fail-safe outputs again
Additional information on passivation and reintegration

For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety, Configuring and Programming
Behavior of the fail-safe module with inputs in the event of a communication disruption
F-modules with inputs respond differently to communication errors compared to other errors.
If a communication error is detected, the current process values remain set at the inputs of
the F-module. There is no passivation of the channels. The current process values are
passivated in the F-CPU.

Maintenance
12.9 Maintenance and repair
12.9 Maintenance and repair

The components of the SIMATIC ET 200SP system are maintenance-free.
Note
Repairs to a SIMATIC ET 200SP system may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
12.10 Warranty
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
instructions.

Test and service functions 13
13.1 Test functions
Introduction
You can test the flow of your user program on the CPU. You monitor signal states and
values of tags, and preassign tags with values so that you can simulate specific situations for
the program flow.
Note
Using test functions
The use of test functions can influence the program execution time and thus the cycle and
response times of the controller to a slight extent (a few milliseconds).
Requirements
● There is an online connection to the relevant CPU.
● An executable program is in the CPU.
Test options
● Testing with program status
● Testing with breakpoints
● Testing with a watch table
● Testing with a force table
● Testing with PLC tag table
● Testing with data block editor
● Testing with the LED flash test
● Testing with trace function

Test and service functions
13.1 Test functions
Testing with program status

The program status allows you to monitor the execution of the program. You can display the
values of operands and the results of logic operations (RLO) allowing you to recognize and
fix logical errors in your program.
Note
Restrictions for the "Program status" function
The monitoring of loops can significantly increase the cycle time. The increase in cycle time
depends on the following factors:
• The number of tags to be monitored
• The actual number of loops run through
WARNING
Testing with program status
A test with the "Program status" function can produce serious property damage and
personal injury in the event of malfunctions or program errors.
Make sure that you take appropriate measures to exclude the risk of hazardous conditions
occurring before running a test with the "Program status" function.
Testing with breakpoints

With this test option, you set breakpoints in your program, establish an online connection,
and enable the breakpoints on the CPU. You then execute a program from one breakpoint to
another.
Requirements:
● Setting breakpoints is possible in the programming language SCL or STL.
Testing with breakpoints provides you with the following advantages:
● Localization of logic errors step by step
● Simple and quick analysis of complex programs prior to actual commissioning
● Recording of current values within individual executed loops
● Use of breakpoints for program validation also possible in SCL/STL networks within
LAD/FBD blocks

13.1 Test functions
Note
Restriction during testing with breakpoints
• When you test with breakpoints, there is a risk of overwriting the cycle time of the CPU.
• If you are using technology objects and test them with breakpoints, the CPU switches to
STOP mode.
Note
F-System SIMATIC Safety
The setting of breakpoints in the standard user program results in errors in the
safety program:
• Sequence of F cycle time monitoring
• Error in communication with the fail-safe I/O
• Error during safety-oriented CPU-CPU communication
• Internal CPU error
If you still wish to use breakpoints for testing, you must deactivate
the safety mode beforehand. This will result in the following errors:
• Error in communication with the fail-safe I/O
• Error during safety-oriented CPU-CPU communication

13.1 Test functions
Testing with watch tables

The following functions are available in the watch table:
● Monitoring of tags
With watch tables, you can monitor the current values of individual tags of a user program
or a CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. For the Web server to be able to display the
value of tags, you must specify a symbolic name for each tag in the "Name" column of the
watch table.
You can monitor the following operand areas:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
– Timers and counters
● Modifying tags
Use this function to assign fixed values to the individual tags of a user program or CPU.
Modifying is also possible for testing with program status.
You can control the following operand areas:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs (for example, %I0.0:P, %Q0.0:P)
– Timers and counters
● "Enable peripheral outputs" and "Control immediately"
These two functions enable you to assign fixed values to individual peripheral outputs of
a CPU in the STOP mode. You can also use them to check your wiring.

13.1 Test functions
Testing with the force table

The following functions are available in the force table.
● Monitoring of tags
With force tables, you can display the current values of individual tags of a user program
or a CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. You can monitor the table with or without a
trigger condition. For the Web server to be able to display the value of tags, you must
specify a symbolic name for each tag in the "Name" column of the force table.
You can monitor the following tags:
– Bit memory
– Peripheral inputs (e.g. %I0.0:P)
● Modifying tags
With this function, you assign fixed values to the individual tags of a user program or a
CPU on the PG/PC and Web server. Modifying is also possible for testing with program
status.
You can control the following tags:
– Bit memories
– Peripheral inputs (e.g. %I0.0:P)
● Forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
You can force individual peripheral inputs or peripheral outputs.
– Peripheral inputs: Forcing of peripheral inputs (for example %I0.0:P) represents the
"bypassing" of sensors/inputs by specifying fixed values to the program. Instead of the
actual input value (via process image or via direct access) the program receives the
force value.
– Peripheral outputs: Forcing of peripheral outputs (for example %Q0.0:P) represents
the "bypassing" of the complete program by setting fixed values for the actuators.
You can use the force table to simulate different test environments and also overwrite tags in
the CPU with a fixed value. This enables you to intervene in the running process to control it.
Difference between modifying and forcing

The fundamental difference between the modifying and forcing functions consists in the
storage behavior:
● Modifying: Modifying of tags is an online function and is not stored in the CPU. You can
end modifying of tags in the watch table or by disconnecting the online connection.
● Forcing: A force job is written to the SIMATIC memory card and is retained after a
POWER OFF. You can only end the forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs in
the force table.

13.1 Test functions
Testing with PLC tag table

You can monitor the data values that tags currently assume in the CPU directly in the PLC
tag table. To do this, open the PLC tag table and start monitoring.
Additionally, you have a possibility of copying PLC tags to a monitoring or force table and of
monitoring, controlling or forcing them there.
Testing with data block editor

Various possibilities of monitoring and controlling tags are at your disposal in the data block
editor. These functions directly access the current values of the tags in the online program.
Current values are the values that the tags assume at the current time during program
execution in the CPU's work memory. The following functions for monitoring and control are
possible via the data block editor:
● Monitoring tags online
● Controlling individual actual values
● Creating a snapshot of the actual values
● Overwriting actual values with a snapshot
Note
Setting data values during commissioning
During commissioning of a system, data values often have to be adjusted to optimally adapt
the program to the general conditions prevailing locally. To this end, the declaration table
offers a few functions for data blocks.
Testing with the LED flash test

In many online dialogs, you can perform an LED flash test. This function is useful, for
example, when you are not sure which device in the hardware configuration corresponds to
the device currently selected in the software.
When you click the "Flash LED" button, an LED flashes on the currently selected device. In
the case of the CPU, the RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash. They flash until you
cancel the flashing test.
Testing with trace function

The trace function is used to record the CPU tags, depending on the settable trigger
conditions. Tags are, for example, the drive parameters or system and user tags of a CPU.
The CPU saves the recordings. You can display and evaluate the recordings with STEP 7, if
necessary.
The trace function can be called from the CPU's folder in the project tree, under the name
"Traces".
In connection with trace functions, also pay attention to the following FAQ on the Internet

13.2 Reading out/saving service data
Simulation
With STEP 7 you can run and test the hardware and software of the project in a simulated
environment. Start the simulation using the menu command "Online" > "Simulation" > "Start".
Reference
You can find more information on test functions in the STEP 7 online help.
Further information about testing with trace and logic analyzer functions is available in the
Function Manual Using the trace and logic analyzer function
Service data
In addition to the contents of the diagnostics buffer, the service data contains a wide range of
extra information about the internal status of the CPU. If a problem occurs with the CPU that
cannot be solved with other methods, send the service data to Service & Support. The
service data allows Service & Support to run fast analysis of the problems that have
occurred.
Note
You cannot simultaneously execute a download to the device while reading out the service
data of the CPU.
Methods of reading service data

You can read service data with:
● The Web server
● STEP 7
● the SIMATIC memory card
Procedure using the Web server

To read service data using the Web server, follow these steps:
1. Open a Web browser that is suitable for communication with the CPU.
2. Enter the following address in the address bar of the web browser:
https://<CPU IP address>/save_service_data, e.g. https://172.23.15.3/save_service_data

3. The service data page will appear on your screen, with a button for saving the service
data.
Figure 13-1 Reading out service data with the Web server
4. Save the service data locally on your PC/programming device, by clicking "Save
ServiceData".
Result: The CPU stores the data in a .dmp file with the following naming convention:
"<Article number> <Serial number> <Time stamp>.dmp". The file name cannot be changed.
Note
If you have defined your user page as the Web server's home page, direct access to the
service data by entering the CPU's IP address is not possible. You will find further
information on reading out service data via a user-defined page in the Web server

You can find more information on saving service data with the keyword "Saving service data"
in the STEP 7 online help.

Procedure via the SIMATIC memory card

If Ethernet communication with the CPU is not possible, use the
SIMATIC memory card to read out the service data. In all other cases, read the service data
via the web server or STEP 7..
The procedure using the SIMATIC memory card is more time-consuming than the other
options for reading out the service data. You must also ensure before reading out that there
is sufficient memory space on the SIMATIC memory card.
To read service data using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of your PC / programming device.
2. Open the job file S7_JOB.S7S in an editor.
3. Overwrite the entry PROGRAM with the string DUMP in the editor.
Do not use any spaces/line breaks/quotation marks to ensure that the file size is exactly
4 bytes.
4. Save the file under the existing file name.
5. Ensure that the SIMATIC memory card is not write-protected and insert the SIMATIC
memory card in the card slot of the CPU. Pay attention to the procedure described in
Removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card on the CPU (Page 205).
Result: The CPU writes the service data file DUMP.S7S to the SIMATIC memory card and
remains in STOP mode.
Service data transfer is complete when the STOP LED stops flashing and is lit continuously.
If the service data transfer was successful, only the STOP LED lights up.
In the event of errors during the transfer, the STOP LED is lit continuously and the ERROR
LED flashes. The CPU also stores a text file with information on the error that occurred in the
DUMP.S7S folder.

Technical specifications 14
Introduction
This chapter lists the technical specifications of the system:
● The standards and test values that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system complies with
and fulfills.
● The test criteria according to which the ET 200SP distributed I/O system was tested.
Technical specifications for the modules

The technical specifications of the individual modules can be found in the manuals of the
modules themselves. In the event of deviations between the statements in this document
and the manuals, the statements in the manuals take priority.
14.1 Standards, approvals and safety notes
Currently valid markings and approvals
Note
Information on the components of the ET 200SP
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the components of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.

Technical specifications
Safety information
WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur
In hazardous areas, personal injury and damage to property may occur if you disconnect
plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system when disconnecting
plug-in connections in hazardous areas.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, Div. 2 or zone 2 may become invalid.
WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D; Class I, zone 2,
Group IIC, or in non-hazardous areas.
Five safety rules for work in or on electrical installations

A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined
for work in or on electrical installations as a preventative measure against electrical
accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against switching on again
3. Verify that the equipment is not live
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Erect barriers around or cover adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an
electrical system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrician is familiar with these rules.

CE marking
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the general and safety-related requirements of
the following directives and conforms to the harmonized standards (EN) for programmable
controllers published in the official journals of the European Union:
● 2014/35/EU "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low
Voltage Directive)
● 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 2014/34/EU "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
● 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive)
● 2006/42/EC "Machinery Directive" for ET 200SP fail-safe modules
The EC Declarations of Conformity are available for the responsible authorities and are kept
at the following address:
Siemens AG
Digital Industries
Factory Automation
DI FA AS SYS
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
They are also available for download on the Siemens Industry Online Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/) website, keyword "Declaration of
Conformity".
cULus approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) OR UL 61010-1 and UL 61010-2-201
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) OR CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 and CSA
C22.2 No. 61010-2-201
OR

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) OR UL 61010-1 and UL 61010-2-201
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) OR CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 and CSA
C22.2 No. 61010-2-201
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING – Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
OR
CSA
CSA C22.2 (Industrial Control Equipment Motor Controllers)

OR
UL
UL 60947-4-2 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear

OR

FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
● Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
● ANSI/UL 12.12.01
● ANSI/ISA 61010-1
● CSA C22.2 No. 213
● CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
● CSA C22.2 No. 0-10
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for FM
● WARNING – Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
OR
ATEX approval
According to EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type
of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)
OR
IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)

RCM Declaration of conformity for Australia/New Zealand
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of the standards
● EN 61000-6-4.
Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP

Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
Marking for the Eurasian Customs Union

EAC (Eurasian Conformity)
Customs Union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan
Declaration of conformity with the technical requirements of the Customs Union (TR CU).
IEC 61131-2
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable logic controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).
IEC 61010-2-201
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements and criteria of IEC 61010-2-
201
(Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use
Part 2-201: Particular requirements for control equipment).
IEC 60947
The motor starters belonging to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system meet the requirements
and criteria of the IEC 60947 standard.
PROFINET standard
The PROFINET interfaces of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on IEC 61158
Type 10.

PROFIBUS standard
The PROFIBUS interfaces of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on IEC 61158
Type 3.
IO-Link standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61131-9.
Shipbuilding approval
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV-GL (Det Norske Veritas - Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
● KR (Korean Register of Shipping)
● CCS (China Classification Society)
● RINA (Registro Italiano Navale)
Use in industrial environments

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in industrial environments. It meets
the following standards for this type of use:
● Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011
● Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Use in mixed areas

Under specific prerequisites you can use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a mixed
area. A mixed area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do
not significantly impact the residential purpose.
If you want to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, you must ensure
that its radio frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with
EN 61000-6-3. Suitable measures for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are, for
example:
● Installation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in grounded control cabinets
● Use of filters in the supply lines
An additional individual acceptance test is also required.

14.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Use in residential areas
Note
ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas. If you are
using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, radio and TV reception may
be affected.
Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
Among other things, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system also meets the requirements of the
EMC legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite is that the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical
equipment.
EMC in accordance with NE21

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the EMC specifications of the NAMUR
recommendation NE21.

Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of the ET 200SP system

The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to pulse-shaped disturbance variables.
Table 14- 1 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables
Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Equivalent to

severity
Electrostatic discharge in accord- Air discharge ±8 kV 3
ance with IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ±6 kV 3
Burst pulses (fast transients) in ±2 kV (power supply line) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4 ±2 kV (signal line >30 m) 3
±1 kV (signal cable <30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see Function manual Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• Asymmetric coupling ±2 kV (power supply lines)
DC with protective elements
3
±2 kV (signal lines/data lines only >30 m) with
protective elements if necessary
• Symmetric coupling ±1 kV (power supply line) DC with protective
elements
±1 kV (signal line/data line only >30 m) with
protective elements if necessary

Pulse-shaped disturbance variables of motor starters

The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP motor starters
with regard to pulse-shaped interference.
Table 14- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables
Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Equivalent to

severity
Burst pulses (fast transients) in ±2 kV (24 V supply cables) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4, ±2 kV (500 V AC infeed*)
tested with 5 kHz.
±1 kV (signal cable <30 m)
If you mount the motor starter to the right of a 15 mm or 20 mm I/O module or immediately next to a
head module, use a dummy module. You will find further information in "Selecting motor starters with
a suitable BaseUnit (Page 40)."
High-energy single pulse (surge) in 500 V AC infeed 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV conducted interference - phase to
ground
±1 kV conducted interference - phase to phase
24 V supply cable:
±1 kV conducted interference - phase to
ground **)
±0.5 kV conducted interference - phase to
phase **)
**) An RC circuit is not required for hybrid switching devices.
If higher values (2 kV (phase to ground) or 1 kV (phase to phase) are required, you will need an addi-
tional external protective circuit (see Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual).
Sinusoidal disturbance variables

The tables below show the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables.
● RF radiation
Table 14- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation
RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 Corresponds to degree

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated of severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 6.0 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
● RF coupling

Table 14- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling
RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 Corresponds to degree

of severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance
Emission of radio frequency interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016.
Table 14- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields
Frequency Interference emission Measuring distance

30 MHz to 230 MHz <40 dB (µV/m) Q 10 m
230 MHz to 1000 MHz <47 dB (µV/m) Q 10 m
1 GHz to 3 GHz <76 dB (µV/m) P 3m
3 GHz to 6 GHz <80 dB (µV/m) P 3m
Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016.
Table 14- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply
Frequency Interference emission

0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (µV/m)Q
< 66 dB (µV/m) M
0.5 MHz to 30 MHz < 73 dB (µV/m)Q
< 60 dB (µV/m) M

14.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules
Protecting ET 200SP with fail-safe modules against overvoltages

If your equipment requires protection from overvoltage, we recommend that you use an
external protective circuit (surge filter) between the load voltage power supply and the load
voltage input of the BaseUnits to ensure surge immunity for the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules.
Note
Overvoltage protection measures always require a case-by-case examination of the entire
plant. Almost complete protection from overvoltages, however, can only be achieved if the
entire building surroundings have been designed for overvoltage protection. In particular, this
involves structural measures in the building design phase.
For detailed information regarding overvoltage protection, we recommend that you contact
your Siemens representative or a company specializing in lightning protection.

The following figure shows an example configuration with fail-safe modules. Voltage is
supplied by one power supply unit. Note, however, that the total current of the modules fed
by the power supply unit must not exceed the permissible limits. You can also use multiple
power supply units.
Figure 14-1 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with failsafe modules

Figure 14-2 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with fail-safe modules
Name Part number of Dehn Co.

A = BVT AVD 24 918 422
B = DCO RK D 5 24 919 986
C = The external protective circuit required at the outputs of the modules F-PM-E power module load
group can be found in the Designing interference-free controllers
Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe motor starters

The safety versions of the motor starters are additionally tested according to the
requirements of IEC 61000-6-7:2014 (taking into consideration the failure criteria for the STO
safety function).

14.4 Shipping and storage conditions
14.4 Shipping and storage conditions
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and
storage conditions according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules
that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging.
Table 14- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules
Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure from 1140 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an elevation
of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Impact acc. to IEC 60068-2-271) 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
1) Not applicable to motor starters

14.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Operating conditions
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations.
The operating conditions are based on the requirements of DIN EN 60721-3-3:1995 +
A2:1997:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
You will find the permissible ambient conditions for the motor starter in the Technical data of
the motor starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/21859/td).
Mechanical environmental conditions

The following table shows the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal
vibrations.
Table 14- 8 Mechanical environmental conditions
Frequency band ET 200SP with IM 155- ET 200SP with ET 200SP with ET 200SP with digital
6 DP HF, BusAdapters BusAdapters BA 2×RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA output module F-RQ
BA 2×FC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC LC/RJ45
and BA LC/FC
5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude --- --- ---
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz 5 g constant acceleration

Tests of mechanical environmental conditions

The following table provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the
tests of environmental mechanical conditions.
Table 14- 9 Tests of mechanical environmental conditions
Condition tested Test standard Comment

Vibrations 2) Vibration test accord- Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sinusoidal) BA 2×RJ45, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA LC/RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA, digital output
module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
IM 155-6 DP HF, BA 2×FC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC, BA
LC/FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 5 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Shock 2) Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Repetitive shock 1) 2) Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three
vertically aligned axes
1) Not applicable in the case of the digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
2) Not applicable for motor starters

Climatic environmental conditions

The table below shows the permissible climatic environmental conditions for the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system:
Table 14- 10 Climatic environmental conditions
Environmental conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: The lower permissible ambient temperature was extended for
horiz. mounting position: -30 °C to 60 °C the ET 200SP system to -30 °C. Differences may exist for spe-
vertical mounting position: -30 °C to 50 °C cific modules and depending on the mounting position and, if
applicable, load. Detailed information on this is described in the
technical specifications of the respective equipment manual.
The product data sheets with daily updated technical specifica-
tions can be found on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/td) at Indus-
try Online Support. Enter the article number or the short de-
scription of the desired module on the website.
Permitted temperature 10 K/h -
change
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation or icing.
Barometric pressure from 1140 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 2000 m.
Note the following section "Using the distributed IO system
ET 200SP over 2000 m above sea level".
Pollutant concentration ANSI/ISA-71.04 severity -
level G1; G2; G3
SIPLUS products based on ET 200SP are offered for reliable operation under heavy to
extreme operating conditions.
Using the distributed IO system ET 200SP over 2000 m above sea level
The maximum "operating height above sea level" depends on the module and is described in
the technical specifications of the respective module. The product data sheets with daily
updated technical specifications can be found on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/td) at Industry Online Support. Enter the
article number or the short description of the desired module on the website.
For altitudes > 2000 m, the following constraints apply to the maximum specified ambient
temperature:

Restrictions of the specified maximum ambient temperature in reference to the installation

altitude
Installation altitude Derating factor for ambient temperature 1)

-1000 m to 2000 m 1.0
2000 m to 3000 m 0.9
3000 m to 4000 m 0.8
4000 m to 5000 m 0.7
1) Base value for application of the derating factor is the maximum permissible ambient temperature in °C for 2000 m.
Note
• Linear interpolation between altitudes is permissible.
• The derating factors compensate for the decreasing cooling effect of air at higher
altitudes due to lower density.
• Note the mounting position of the respective module in the technical specifications. The
basis is the standard IEC 61131-2:2017.
• Make sure that the power supplies you use are rated for altitudes > 2000 m.
Effects on the availability of modules

The higher cosmic radiation present during operation at altitudes above 2000 m will also
start to have an effect on the failure rate of electronic components (the so-called soft error
rate). In rare cases this can result in a transition of modules to the safe state, especially for
fail-safe modules. However, the functional safety of the modules is fully retained.
Note
Fail-safe modules are certified for operation in safety mode up to the maximum altitude listed
in the product data sheet.
All other markings and certifications are currently based on an altitude of up to 2000 m.

14.6 Insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Information on PFDavg, PFH values for ET 200SP F

PFDavg and PFH values for F-CPUs at operating altitudes up to 5,000 m. Below you will find
the probability of failure values (PFDavg and PFH values) for the F-CPUs with a service life
of 20 years and with a repair time of 100 hours:
Operation in low demand mode in accordance with Operation in high demand or continuous mode
IEC 61508:2010: in accordance with IEC 61508:2010:
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure
failure on demand [h-1]
< 2E-05 < 1E-09
Note
For fail-safe I/O modules, the respective specifications for the PFDavg and PFH values in
the product data sheets apply.
Insulation
The insulation for the I/O modules is dimensioned according to the requirements of
EN 61131-2:2007 and EN 61010-2-201: The insulation for the motor starters is designed in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 60947-1.
Note
In the case of modules with 24 V DC (SELV/PELV) supply voltage, galvanic isolations are
tested with 707 V DC (type test).
Pollution degree/overvoltage category in accordance with IEC 61131 and IEC 61010-2-201
● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II
Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 60947

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: III

Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007 and IEC 61010-2-201

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets protection class I and includes parts of
protection classes II and III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for a functional earth FE.
Recommendation: For an interference-proof installation, the ground conductor should have a
cross-section > 6 mm2.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.
Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system, which means:
● Protection against contact with standard probes
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water
Note
Use a BU cover
To meet the requirements of the degree of protection "IP20", fit a BU cover onto unfitted
BaseUnits.
To ensure touch safety, fit a cover onto the opening of the infeed bus contacts belonging to
the last plugged-in motor starter BaseUnit.
Rated voltage for operation

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances listed in the following table.
Note the supply voltage of each module when selecting the rated voltage.
Table 14- 11 Rated voltage for operation
Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1)
18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2)
120 V AC 93 to 132 V AC
230 V AC 187 to 264 V AC
400 V AC 3) 48 to 500 V AC
1) Static value: Generation as protective extra low voltage with safe electrical separation in accord-
ance with IEC 61131-2 or. IEC 61010-2-201.
2) Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g. as in the case of three-phase bridge power rectification
3) Valid for the infeed bus of the modules and BaseUnits of motor starters only

14.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres
14.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres

See product information "Use of subassemblies/modules in Zone 2 Hazardous Area"
Note
Zone 22: Observe standards and regulations, and individual acceptance test required
If you install, use and maintain the ET 200SP in hazardous area Zone 22, you must comply
with the relevant standards, installation/setup regulations and country-specific regulations for
Zone 22 (for example, the ET 200SP must be installed in an enclosure suitable for Zone 22).
A individual acceptance test by a certification body (Ex) is also required.

Dimension drawings A
A.1 Shield connector
Dimensional diagram of the shield connector
Figure A-1 Dimensional diagram of the shield connector
A.2 Labeling strip
Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll)
Figure A-2 Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (roll)
Dimension drawing of the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheet)

The product information for the labeling strips (DIN A4 sheets) is available for download on
the Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/de/Catalog/Product/6ES7193-6LA10-
0AA0).

Dimension drawings
A.3 Reference identification labels
A.3 Reference identification labels
Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet
Figure A-3 Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet

Accessories/spare parts B
Accessories for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table B- 1 Accessories, general
Accessories, general Packing unit Article number

Cover for the BusAdapter interface 5 units 6ES7591-3AA00-0AA0
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector 1 unit 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0
Server module (spare part) 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
BU cover
• 15 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0
• 20 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0
24 V DC connector (spare part) 10 units 6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0

Shield connection for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield terminals) 5 units 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules)
• Roll, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 500 strips), film, for labeling 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0
with thermal transfer roll printer
• Roll, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 500 strips), film, for labeling with 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0
thermal transfer roll printer
• DIN A4 sheets, light gray labeling strips (with a total of 1000 labels), paper, 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0
perforated, for labeling with laser printer
• DIN A4 sheets, yellow labeling strips (with a total of 1000 labels), paper, 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0
perforated, for labeling with laser printer
Electronic coding element (type H) (spare part) 5 units 6ES7193-6EH00-1AA0
Electronic coding element (type F, for fail-safe modules) (spare part) 5 units 6ES7193-6EF00-1AA0
Mounting rails, tinned steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA11

Accessories/spare parts
Table B- 2 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide
Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide Packing unit Article number
16 process terminals (see I/O module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 10 units 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC01 10 units 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC01 50 units 6ES7193-6CP01-4MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC02 10 units 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color code CC02 50 units 6ES7193-6CP02-4MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), gray (terminals 13 to 16); 10 units 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0
color code CC03
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), blue (terminals 13 to 16); 10 units 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0
color code CC04
• Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 and 14), blue (terminals 15 and 10 units 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0
16)
10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC71 10 units 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0
• Red (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC72 10 units 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0
• Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 10 units 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0
• Blue (terminals 1 A to 10 A); color code CC73 50 units 6ES7193-6CP73-4AA0
10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T)

• Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 to 5C); color code CC74 10 units 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0
16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P1/x-R)

• Red (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC62 10 units 6ES7193-6CP62-2MA0
16 potential terminals (for PotDis-BU-P2/x-B)

• Blue (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC63 10 units 6ES7193-6CP63-2MA0
18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P1-R)

• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC10 10 units 6ES7193-6CP10-2MT0
18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-P2-B)

• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0
18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-BR-W)

• Yellow/green (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC11 10 units 6ES7193-6CP11-2MT0
• Red (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC12 10 units 6ES7193-6CP12-2MT0
• Blue (terminals 1 to 18); color code CC13 10 units 6ES7193-6CP13-2MT0
18 potential terminals (for PotDis-TB-n.c.-G)


Table B- 3 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 20 mm wide
Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 20 mm wide Packing unit Article number
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 12); 10 units 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
color code CC41
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 and 10), blue (terminals 11 and 10 units 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0
12), color code CC42
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), blue (terminal 6); color code CC51 10 units 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0
• Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals 3 and 4), blue (terminal 6); color 10 units 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0
code CC52
4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC81 10 units 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0
• Red (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC82 10 units 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0
• Blue (terminals 1 A to 4 A); color code CC83 10 units 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0
2 AUX terminals (for BU20-P6+A2+4D, BU20-P6+A2+4B)

• Yellow-green (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC84 10 units 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0
• Red (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC85 10 units 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0
• Blue (terminals 1 A and 2 A); color code CC86 10 units 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0
Table B- 4 SIMATIC memory card accessories
Capacity Packing unit Article number

4 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LCxx-0AA0
12 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LExx-0AA0
24 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LFxx-0AA0
256 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LL02-0AA0
2 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LPxx-0AA0
32 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LTxx-0AA0
Table B- 5 Accessories for motor starters
Short designation Packing unit Article number

3DI/LC module (connecting terminal) 1 unit 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0
Fan 1 unit 3RW4928-8VB00
BU cover 30 1 unit 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0
Touch protection cover for the infeed bus 10 units 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0
Mechanical bracket for BaseUnit 5 units 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0

B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules
Components for lightning protection (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1, 1 to 2 and 2 to 3)

You must install overvoltage protection devices in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for
lightning protection purposes. You can find more information in the Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function
manual.
Online catalog
Additional article numbers for ET 200SP can be found on the Internet
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and online ordering system.
See also
Firmware update (Page 242)
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules
Overvoltage arrestors for fail-safe modules
Note
This section only lists the overvoltage arrestors that may be used to protect the fail-safe
modules.
Be sure to observe the detailed information on lightning protection and overvoltage
protection of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-
safe modules (Page 278).
Components for overvoltage protection of fail-safe modules (lightning protection zone transition
0B to 1)
The overvoltage arrestors are only required for unshielded cables. The Configuring
interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)
Function Manual lists the overvoltage arrestors which you may use for fail-safe modules.

Calculating the leakage resistance C
Introduction
If you wish to protect the ET 200SP using a ground-fault detector or a residual current circuit
breaker, then you need the leakage resistance to select the correct safety components.
Ohmic resistance
When determining the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP, you must take into account the
ohmic resistance from the RC combination of the module in question:
Table C- 1 Ohmic resistance
Module Ohmic resistance from RC network

CPU/interface module 10 MΩ (±5 %)
BaseUnit BU15...D 10 MΩ (±5 %)
BaseUnit BU30-MSx 10 MΩ (±5 %)
Formula
You can calculate the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP using the following formula if you
protect all of the modules listed above with one ground-fault detector:
RET200SP = Rmodule / N
RET200SP = Leakage resistance of the ET 200SP
Rmodule = Leakage resistance of a module
N = Number of BaseUnits BU15...D and interface module in the ET 200SP
RCPU/IM = RBU15...D = RModule = 9.5 MΩ
RCPU/IM = Leakage resistance of CP/interface module
RBU15...D = Leakage resistance of the BaseUnit BU15...D
If you protect the modules listed above within an ET 200SP with several ground-fault
detectors, you must determine the leakage resistance for each individual ground-fault
detector.

Calculating the leakage resistance
Example
The structure of an ET 200SP system consists of an IM 155-6 PN ST, two BaseUnits
BU15...D and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200SP is protected with one
ground-fault detector:
Figure C-1 Calculation example for leakage resistance

Safety-relevant symbols D
D.1 Safety-related symbols for devices without Ex protection
The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device,
its packaging or the accompanying documentation.
Symbol Meaning
General warning sign Caution/Notice
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and im-
plement countermeasures.
Read the information provided by the product documentation.
ISO 7010 M002
Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person.

IEC 60417 No. 6182
Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected
minimum and maximum ambient temperature.
Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC
regulations.
Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dan-
gerous.
ANSI Z535.2
Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective
low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment"
Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for in-
door use.
Note that an enclosure is required for installing the device. Enclosures are con-
sidered:
• Standing control cabinet
• Serial control cabinet
• Terminal boxes
• Wall enclosure

Safety-relevant symbols
D.2 Safety-related symbols for devices with Ex protection

The following table contains an explanation of the symbols located in your SIMATIC device,
its packaging or the accompanying documentation.
Symbol Meaning
The assigned safety symbols apply to devices with Ex approval.
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the potential risks and enable you to recognize risks and im-
plement countermeasures.
Read the information provided by the product documentation.

ISO 7010 M002
Ensure the device is only installed by electrically skilled person.

IEC 60417 No. 6182
Observe the mechanical rating of the device.
Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected
minimum and maximum ambient temperature.
Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC
regulations.
When the device is under voltage, note that it may not be installed or removed, or
plugged or pulled.
Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dan-
gerous.
ANSI Z535.2
Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective
low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment"
Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for in-
door use.

Safety-relevant symbols
Symbol Meaning
For Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may only
be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection ≥ IP54.
For Zone 22 potentially explosive atmospheres, be aware that the device may
only be used when it is installed in an enclosure with a degree of protection ≥
IP6x.

Glossary
1oo1 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of the 1oo1 evaluation, there → is one sensor with
a 1-channel connection to the F module.
1oo2 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of 1oo2 evaluation , two input channels are
assigned one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors. The input signals are
compared internally for equivalence or nonequivalence.
Acknowledgment time
During the acknowledgment time, the → F-I/O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the →
F-CPU. The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the → monitoring time and
→ response time of the overall fail-safe system.
Actuator
Actuators are, for example, power relays or contactors for switching on load devices or load
devices themselves (e.g. directly controlled solenoid valves).
Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process
sequences of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The
automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions
depending on the automation task.
AUX bus
Self-assembling bus, can be used individually, for example, as a protective conductor bus or
for additional required voltage. Observe the corresponding information/warnings in the
ET 200SP system manual.
Availability
Availability is the probability that a system is functional at a specific point in time. Availability
can be increased by redundancy, e.g., by using multiple -> sensors at thesame measuring
point.

Glossary
AWG (American Wire Gauge)

A standard measure for conductors used in the USA, which is assigned to a specific cross-
sectional area of a conductor or wire. Each AWG number represents a jump of 26% in the
cross-sectional area. The thicker the wire, the smaller the AWG number.
BaseUnit
BaseUnits realize the electrical and mechanical connection of the I/O modules with the
interface module and the server module.
The inserted I/O module determines the signals at the terminals of the BaseUnits.
Depending on the selected BaseUnit, only certain terminals are available.
BaseUnit, dark-colored
Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the left adjacent module to the
subsequent modules on the right.
BaseUnit, light-colored
Inserted as first BaseUnit and opens a new potential group with electrical isolation. The
power and AUX buses are separate from the adjacent module on the left. It feeds the supply
voltage.
Baud rate
Speed at which data is transferred, indicating the number of transmitted bits per second
(baud rate = bit rate).
BU cover
Cover for unused slots on the BaseUnit or placeholder for planned I/O modules. For a future
expansion, the reference identification label of the planned I/O module can be kept here.
Bus
Joint transmission path to which all participants of a fieldbus system are connected; has two
defined ends.
BusAdapter
Enables free selection of the connection technology for the PROFINET fieldbus.
Channel fault
Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit.
In channel-specific passivation, the affected channel is either automatically reintegrated or
the fail-safe module must be removed and reinserted after the fault has been eliminated.

Glossary
Channel group
The channels of a module are grouped together in a channel group. Certain parameters in
STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups, rather than to individual channels.
Channel number
Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to
assign channel-specific diagnostic messages.
Channel-specific passivation
With this type of passivation, only the affected channel is passivated in the event of a →
channel fault. In the event of a → module fault, all channels of the → fail-safe module are
passivated.
Configuration
Systematic arrangement of the individual modules.
Configuration control
Function that enables a flexible adjustment of the actual configuration based on a configured
maximum configuration via the user program. Input, output and diagnostics addresses
remain unchanged.
Connecting to common potential

Configuring a new potential group for which a new infeed is set up for the supply voltage.
Connection plug
Physical connection between device and cable.
CPU
The CPU uses the integrated system power supply to supply the electronics of the modules
via the backplane bus. The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user
program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the
work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces of the CPU establish an Industrial
Ethernet connection. The CPUs of the ET 200SP support operation as an IO controller, I-
device or standalone CPU.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check

Glossary
CRC signature
The validity of the process values in the safety frame, the accuracy of the assigned address
references, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of the CRC signature
in the safety frame.
Crimping
Procedure in which two components, e.g. end sleeve and cable, are connected with each
other by plastic strain.
Dark period
Dark periods occur during shutdown tests and complete bit pattern tests. The fail-safe output
module switches test-related zero signals to the active output. This output is then briefly
disabled (= dark period). An adequate carrier → actuator will not respond to this and will
remain activated.
Derating
Derating allows devices to be used even in harsh operating conditions by selectively
restricting the output capacity. In the case of motor starters, this usually refers to operation at
high ambient temperatures.
Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name.
An IO device is delivered without a device name. An IO device can only be addressed by the
IO controller after it has been assigned a device name via the PG/PC or via the topology,
e.g. for the transfer of configuration data (such as IP address) during startup or for the
exchange of user data during cyclic operation.
Diagnostics
Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further
evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This
increases the availability of plants because commissioning times and downtimes are
reduced.
Discrepancy analysis
The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications
to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The
discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input
signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is performed to
determine whether the difference (for nonequivalence testing: the same levels) has
disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this
means that a discrepancy error exists.

Glossary
The discrepancy analysis compares the two input signals of the 1oo2 sensor evaluation in
the fail-safe input module.
Discrepancy time
Configurable time for the → discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the
fault detection time and → fault reaction time are extended unnecessarily. If the discrepancy
time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily since a discrepancy error is
detected when, in reality, no error exists.

System with input and output modules that are configured on a distributed basis, far away
from the CPU controlling them.
DP
→ Distributed I/O system
Earth
Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (potential equalization conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical
equipment and other conductive bodies to the same or almost the same potential, in order to
prevent disruptive or dangerous voltages between these bodies.
Fail-safe modules
ET 200SP modules with integrated safety functions that can be used for safety-related
operation (safety mode).
Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems (F-systems) remain in a safe state or immediately assume another safe
state as soon as particular failures occur.
Fault reaction time

The maximum fault reaction time of an F-system defines the interval between the occurrence
of any fault and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs.
For → F-system overall: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the
occurrence of any fault in any → F-I/O and a safe response at the relevant fail-safe output.
For digital inputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction on the backplane bus.

Glossary
For digital outputs: The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the digital output.
Fault tolerance time

The fault tolerance time of a process is the time a process can be left unattended without risk
to life and limb of the operating personnel, or damage to the environment.
Any type of F-system control is tolerated within this fault tolerance time, i.e. the → F-system
can control its processes incorrectly or even not at all. The fault tolerance time depends on
the type of process and must be determined on a case-by-case basis.
F-CPU
An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is permitted for use in
SIMATIC Safety. A standard user program can also be run on the F-CPU.
F-I/O
Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration into
the SIMATIC Safety F-system. Available F-I/O modules:
● Fail-safe I/O module for ET 200eco
● Fail-safe signal modules S7-300 (F-SMs)
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200S
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200MP
● Fail-safe DP standard slaves
● Fail-safe PA field devices
● Fail-safe IO devices
Firmware update
Upgrade of firmware for modules (interface modules, I/O modules etc.), e.g. after function
extensions, to the newest firmware version (update).
F-monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time
F-Systems
→ fail-safe systems

Glossary
Functional ground
Functional ground is a low-impedance current path between electric circuits and ground. It is
not designed as a safety measure but instead, for example, as a measure to improve
interference immunity.
Ground
All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous
contact voltage, even in the event of a fault.
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by
means of a grounding system.
GSD file
As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET or
PROFIBUS device that are necessary for its configuration in XML format.
I/O modules
All modules, with the exception of the motor starters, that can be operated with a CPU or an
interface module.
Identification data
Information that is saved in modules and that supports the user in checking the plant
configuration and locating hardware changes.
Infeed system
The infeed system with the terminals L1(L), L2(N), L3, PE enables several SIMATIC ET
200SP motor starters to be supplied using a single infeed terminal.
Interface module
Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O
system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller) and prepares the data for and from I/O
modules.
IO-Link
IO-Link is a point-to-point connection to conventional and intelligent sensors/actuators by
unshielded standard cables in proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is downward compatible to
all DI/DQ sensors/actuators. Switching status channel and data channel are designed in
proven 24 V DC technology.

Glossary
Line
All the modules attached to a mounting rail.
Load current supply

Supply of modules like the interface module, power supply modules, I/O modules, and (if
applicable) sensors and actuators.
MAC address
Device identification unique worldwide, which is already assigned to each PROFINET device
in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the
device ID (serial number). The MAC address is usually legible on the device.
Main switch
Every industrial machine that falls under the scope of DIN EN 60204 Part 1 (VDE 0113,
Part 1) must be equipped with a main switch that disconnects all electrical equipment from
the network while cleaning, maintenance, and repair work is being carried out, as well as
during long periods of downtime. Usually a switch which can be operated by hand that is
stipulated for electrical or mechanical prevention of a hazard. The main switch can also
function as an EMERGENCY-OFF device.
The main switch must meet the following requirements:
● Externally accessible mechanical rotary lock.
● Only one OFF position and one ON position with allocated stops.
● Two positions labeled "0" and "I". 4th lockable OFF position.
● Cover for the power supply terminals to protect against accidental contact.
● The switching capacity must correspond to AC-23 for motor switches and AC-22 for load-
break switches (utilization category).
● Switch position displayed automatically.
Module fault
Module faults can be external faults (e.g. missing load voltage) or internal faults (e.g.
processor failure). Internal faults always require module replacement.
Monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time
Motor starter
Motor starter is the generic term for direct-on-line and reversing starters.

Glossary
M-switch
Each fail-safe digital output of ET 200SP F-modules consists of a P-switch DO-Px (current
sourcing) and an M-switch DO-Mx (current sinking). The load is connected between the P-
switch and M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the
load.
Node
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. IO device via PROFINET IO.
Nonequivalent sensor
A nonequivalent → sensor is a two-way switch that is connected to two inputs of an → F-I/O
(via 2 channels) in → fail-safe systems (for → 1oo2 evaluation of sensor signals).
Overload release
Overcurrent release that provides protection against overload.
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO controller/DP master to the
IO device/DP slave.
Passivation
If an → F-I/O module detects a fault it switches either the affected channel or all channels to
a → safe state, i.e. the channels of this F-I/O module are passivated. The F-I/O module
signals the detected faults to the → F-CPU.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with inputs, the → F-System provides fail-safe values for
the → safety program instead of the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with outputs, the F-system returns fail-safe values (0) to
the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
Performance Level
Performance Level (PL) in accordance with ISO 13849-1 or EN ISO 13849-1
Potential group
Group of I/O modules that are jointly supplied with voltage.

Glossary
Prewiring
Wiring the electrics on a mounting rail before the I/O modules are connected.
Process image (I/O)

The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the
start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the
process image input. At the end of the cyclic program, the process image output is
transmitted as signal state to the output modules.
Product version (ES) = Functional status (FS)

The product version or functional status provides information on the hardware version of the
module.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, process and fieldbus standard that is specified in IEC 61158 Type 3. It
specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= Distributed Periphery), FMS (=
Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation) or TF (= Technological
Functions).
PROFINET
PROcess FIeld NETwork, open industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS
and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation and engineering
model by PROFIBUS International e.V., defined as an automation standard.
PROFINET IO controller
Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). This means:
The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO
controller often corresponds to the CPU in which the automation program is running.
PROFINET IO
Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the
scope of PROFINET.
PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed
I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches).

Glossary
PROFIsafe
Safety-oriented PROFINET I/O bus profile for communication between the → safety program
and the → F-I/O module in a → fail-safe system.
PROFIsafe address
The PROFIsafe address (code name according to IEC 61784-3-3: 2010) is used to protect
standard addressing mechanisms such as IP addresses. The PROFIsafe address consists
of the F-source address and F-destination address. Every → fail-safe module therefore has
two address portions, the F-source address and the F-destination address.
The PROFIsafe address must be configured in the hardware and network editor.
PROFIsafe monitoring time

Monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O
Proof-test interval
Period after which a component must be forced to fail-safe state, that is, it is either replaced
with an unused component, or is proven faultless.
Provider-Consumer principle
Principle of data communication on the PROFINET IO: in contrast to PROFIBUS, both
parties are independent providers when sending data.
P-switch
→ M-switch
Push-in terminal
Push-in connections are a form of spring-loaded terminals allowing wiring without tools for
rigid conductors or conductors equipped with end sleeves.
Redundancy, availability-enhancing
Multiple instances of components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in
the event of hardware faults.
Redundancy, safety-enhancing
Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on
comparison; such as → 1oo2 evaluation in → fail-safe modules.

Glossary
Reference identification
In accordance with EN 81346, a specific object is clearly referenced in relation to the system
to whose components the object belongs. Thus, unique identification of the modules in the
entire system is possible.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the participating circuits are considered and/or
measured.
Reintegration
After the elimination of a fault, it is necessary to ensure the reintegration (depassivation) of
the → F-I/O. Reintegration (switchover from fail-safe values to process values) occurs either
automatically or only after a user acknowledgment in the safety program.
In the case of a fail-safe input module, the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs are
made available to thesafety program again after reintegration. In the case of a fail-safe
output module, the → fail-safe system transfers the output values in the safety program to the
fail-safe outputs again.
RIOforFA-Safety
Remote IO for Factory Automation with PROFIsafe; Profile for F-I/O
RoHS
EC Directive 2011/65/EU concerning the restriction of certain dangerous substances in
electrical and electronic devices regulates the use of hazardous substances in devices and
components. The English abbreviation RoHS is used to refer to this directive: (Restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances), as well as all related measures for implementing it
into national legislation.
Safe state
The basic principle of the safety concept in F-systems is the existence of a safe state for all
process variables. For the digital F-I/O, for example, the safe state is the value "0".
Safety class
Safety level (Safety Integrity Level) SIL according to IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety
Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for
management of systematic faults and hardware failures.
The fail-safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3.
Safety frame
In safety mode, data are transferred between the → F-CPU and → F-I/O in a safety frame.

Glossary
Safety function
A mechanism integrated in the → F-CPU and → F-I/O that enables their use in → the fail-safe
system SIMATIC Safety.
According to IEC 61508:2010: A safety function is implemented by a safety system in order
to maintain or force a system safe state in the event of a specific fault.
Safety mode
Operating mode of → F-I/O that enables → safety-related communication via → safety frames.
→ ET 200SP fail-safe modules can only used in safety mode.
Safety program
Safety-related user program
Safety-related communication
Communication used to exchange fail-safe data.
Self-assembling voltage buses

Three internal, self-assembling buses (P1, P2 and AUX) that supply the I/O modules with
power.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
Sensor evaluation
There are two types of sensor evaluation:
→ 1oo1 evaluation – sensor signal is read once
→ 1oo2 evaluation – sensor signal is read in twice by the same F-module and compared
internally
Sensors
Sensors are used for the accurate detection of routes, positions, velocities, rotational
speeds, masses, etc. in the form of digital and analog signals.
Server module
The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.

Glossary
Service life
Period of time for which the switching device will work properly under normal operating
conditions. This is specified as the number of operating cycles, the electrical durability (e.g.
contact erosion), and the mechanical durability (e.g. operating cycles without load).
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Discrete level (one of three possibilities) for defining safety integrity specifications of safety-
related control functions. Safety integrity level 3 is the highest possible level, level 1 the
lowest.
Slave station
A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master.
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for diagnosing
and also configuring the Ethernet infrastructure.
In the office area and in automation technology, devices support a wide range of
manufacturers on the Ethernet SNMP.
SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications
with PROFINET.
Standard mode
Operating mode of F-I/O in which standard communication is possible by means of → safety
frames, but not → safety-related communication.
Fail-safe ET 200SP modules can only be operated in safety mode.
Switch
PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive
cable - the bus.
By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communication
node is interconnected directly with precisely one other communication node.
If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node
is connected to the port of an active network component - the switch. Other communications
devices (including switches) can then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The
connection between a communication node and the switch remains a point-to-point
connection.
The task of a switch is thus to regenerate and distribute received signals. The switch "learns"
the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only
forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or switch.
A switch has a specific number of connections (ports). You connect at most one PROFINET
device or additional switch to each port.

Glossary
Technology object
A technology object supports you in the configuration and commissioning of a technological
function.
The properties of real objects are represented by the technology objects in the controller.
Real objects can be, for example, controlled systems or drives.
The technology object includes all data of the real object that is required for its open-loop or
closed-loop control, and it signals the status information.
TIA Portal
Totally Integrated Automation Portal
The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation.
The software optimizes all operating, machine and process sequences.
Total current
Sum of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
TWIN end sleeve

End sleeve for two cables
Type of coordination 1
The motor starter may be non-operational after a short circuit has been cleared. Damage to
the motor starter is permissible.
Types of coordination
The IEC 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) standard distinguishes between two types of
coordination referred to as coordination type "1" and coordination type "2". The short circuit
that needs to be dealt with is cleared reliably and safely with both types of coordination; the
only differences are in the extent of the damage sustained by the device following a short
circuit.

Glossary

Index
Wiring, 105
Wiring rules, 98
2 BU cover
Assembling, 85
24 V DC supply, 88
Description, 30
Installation, 115
BusAdapter, 27
3
3DI/LC module, 33, 120
Assembling, 121 C
Connections, 109
Cable shield, 104
Disassembling, 122
Changes
Functions, 109
Compared to previous version, 15, 15
3-wire connection, 62
Changing type
Coding element, 230
I/O module, 231
A
Climatic environmental conditions, 275
Accessible devices Color identification label, 125
Firmware update, 239 Description, 32
Accessories, 281 Installing, 126
Addressing, 136 Commissioning, 189, 190, 196
Basics, 136 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card, 201
Application Reset to factory settings, 245
in industrial environments, 266 Startup, 201
in mixed areas, 267 Components
in residential areas, 267 ET 200SP at a glance, 25
Approvals, 261 In accordance with DIN VDE regulation, 94
IEC 61010, 266 Configuration, 19
Assembling, 76 Basics, 134
3DI/LC module, 120 Electrical, 97
BU cover, 84 On grounded reference potential, 93
Infeed bus, 81 Configuration control, 163
Assembly/disassembly position, 119 Configuration example, 191, 193, 195, 196, 198, 200
AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus), 53 Configuration software, 131
Configuring, 131
Properties of the CPUs, 135
B Connecting
Cable shield, 104
BaseUnit, 28, 35
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the
Assembling, 77, 118
interface module, 114
Disassembling, 232
Control data record, 172
Modules with temperature measurement, 42
S7-1500, 169
Modules without temperature measurement, 40
CPU
Mounting, dismantling, 74
Backup/restore contents, 213
Potential group, 51, 56
Reading out service data, 257
Replacing the terminal box, 233
Reset to factory settings, 242
Types, 35
Synchronizing the time, 215
wiring, 101

Index
D Grounding
Configuration on grounded reference potential, 93
Degree of protection, 277
Graphical overview of ET 200SP, 96
Dimensional diagram
Labeling strip, 279
Reference identification label, 280
I
Shield connector, 279
Disassembling, 232 I/O module, 29
Dummy module Changing type, 231
mounting, 70 Inserting or removing, 227
Installation, 115
replace, 232
E Identification data, 220
IEC 61010, 266
Electrical isolation, 97
Incoming supply, grounded, 93
Electrical relationships, 97
Infeed bus
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 267
Assembling, 81
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 267
Cover, 33
EMERGENCY STOP devices, 87
Infeed bus cover, 33
Environmental conditions
Installation
Climatic, 275
BaseUnit, 74
Mechanical, 274
BU cover, 115
ET 200SP
I/O module, 115, 227
Area of application, 18
Interface module, 71
Commissioning, 189
Minimum clearances, 67
Components, 25
Mounting position, 65
Configuration example, 20, 23
Mounting rail, 65
Configuring, 131
Rules, 67
Overall configuration, 96
Server module, 79
Rules and regulations for operation, 87
Insulation, 277
Selecting a BaseUnit, 35
Interface module, 26
Short-circuit / overload protection, 94
Connecting the supply voltage, 110
Example
ET 200SP configuration, 20, 23
RESET, 245
Leakage resistance, 288
Reset to factory settings, 245
Potential group, configuration, 61
Wiring rules, 98
Interference-free design, 69
F
Factory settings, 242 L
Fan, 33
Labeling strip
Mounting, 117
Dimensional diagram, 279
FAQ
Labeling strips, 32
Emergency address, 213
Installing, 128
Trace function, 256
Leakage resistance, 287
Firmware update, 234
Lightning protection, 88
Line voltage, 87
G
Grounded extra-low-voltage, 94 M
Maintenance, 227
Changing type, 231

Index
Firmware update, 234 Overall configuration, 96

Reading out service data, 257 Overview, graphic
Removal and insertion, 227 Grounding the ET 200SP, 96
Replacing modules, 232
Replacing the terminal box, 233
Reset to factory settings, 242 P
Test functions, 251
Parking position/OFF, 119
Marking, 123
Password provider, 157
Color coding, factory setting, 123
PELV
Optional, 125
Grounded extra-low-voltage, 94
Maximum configuration, 49
Pollution degree, 277
Maximum cycle time, (Cycle monitoring time)
Potential distributor module, 28
Mechanical bracket, 33
Installing, 79
Mounting, 83
Selecting a PotDis-BaseUnit, 47
Mechanical environmental conditions, 274
Selecting a PotDis-TerminalBlock, 48
Memory reset
Potential group
Automatic, 209
Configuration example, 61
Basics, 208
Forming, 51, 56
Manual, 210
Operating principle, graphical overview, 55, 56
Minimum clearances, 67
Process image
Motor starter, 29
Inputs and outputs, 138
Assembling, 77, 118
Process image partition
Disassembling, 118, 232
Updating in the user program, 139
Mounting, 53, 67, 81, 84
updating, automatically, 138
Dummy module, 70
PROFINET IO, 189
Mechanical bracket, 82
Protection, 153, 158, 161
Mounting position, 65
Access levels, 154
Mounting rail, 25, 65
Behavior of a password-protected CPU, 156
Copy protection, 161
Know-how protection, 158
N
Protection against short circuit, 93
Network Time Protocol, 215 Protection class, 277, 277
NTP procedure, 215
R
O Radio interference, 267, 270
OBs, 142 Rated voltage, 278
Event source, 142 Reading out service data, 257
Priorities, 142 Reassigning parameters, 211
Priorities and runtime behavior, 143 Reference identification label, 32, 125
Queue, 142 Dimensional diagram, 280
Start events, 142 Installing, 128
Operating modes Remove, 227
Basics, 203 Replacement
Operating mode transitions, 207 Coding element, 232
RUN, 206 I/O module, 232
Setting the startup behavior, 205 Terminal box on the BaseUnit, 233
STARTUP, 203 Replacing the terminal box, 233
STOP, 206 RESET, 245
Operating position, 119 Reset to factory settings, 245
Option handling, (See configuration control) with RESET button, 245

Index
S Z
S7-FCT, 133 Zone 2 potentially explosive atmosphere, 278
Safe electrical separation, 93
Safety rules, 262
SELV
Safe electrical separation, 93
Server module, 31
Shield connection
Description, 32
Shield connector
Dimensional diagram, 279
Shipping conditions, 273
Short-circuit and overload protection according to
DIN VDE regulation, 94
Short-circuit protection, 93
SIMATIC ET 200SP, 17
Spare parts, 281
Standards, 261
Starting up the ET 200SP, 201
Storage conditions, 273
Supply of external components, 63
Supply voltage, 110
Connecting, 111
Potential group, 51, 56
Synchronizing the time, 215
T
Climatic environmental conditions, 275
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 267
Mechanical environmental conditions, 274
Shipping and storage conditions, 273
Standards and approvals, 261
Test functions, 251
Test voltage, 277
V
Video sequence, 108
W
Wiring
BaseUnit, 105
BaseUnits, 101
General rules for ET 200SP, 87
Rules, 98


ET 200SP Distributed IO System System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET 200SP Distributed IO System System Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ET 200SP Distributed IO System System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distributed I/O system

Siemens AG A5E03576849-AJ Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2019.

Purpose of the documentation

Basic knowledge required

Validity of the documentation

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Recycling and disposal

Distributed I/O system

Siemens Industry Online Support

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

5.7 Installing potential distributor modules ................................................................................... 78

Distributed I/O system

7.2 Configuring the CPU .............................................................................................................134

Distributed I/O system

11.6 Operating modes of the CPU ............................................................................................... 206

Distributed I/O system

14.4 Shipping and storage conditions...........................................................................................281

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Manual Collection ET 200SP

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Customer benefits of the system

Figure 3-1 SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system - Customer benefits

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

3.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?

Fail-safe automation systems

Fail-safe motor starters

Area of application of ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

Distributed I/O system

3.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP

Figure 3-3 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration)

Fail-safe ET 200SP I/O modules

ET 200SP fail-safe motor starters

Distributed I/O system

Example of a configuration with fail-safe I/O modules

Distributed I/O system

Hardware and software requirements

Use in safety mode only

Distributed I/O system

Achievable safety classes

Safety class in safety mode

Distributed I/O system

Basic components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table 3- 2 Basic components of the ET 200SP

Basic component Function Figure

CPU/Fail-safe CPU The (F) CPU:

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

Interface module for The interface module:

Interface module for The interface module:

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

For mixed ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration,